WO2007037528A1 - Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus - Google Patents

Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007037528A1
WO2007037528A1 PCT/JP2006/320004 JP2006320004W WO2007037528A1 WO 2007037528 A1 WO2007037528 A1 WO 2007037528A1 JP 2006320004 W JP2006320004 W JP 2006320004W WO 2007037528 A1 WO2007037528 A1 WO 2007037528A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ink
supply
ink cartridge
case
ambient air
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2006/320004
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007037528A9 (en
Inventor
Shingo Hattori
Tomohiro Kanbe
Toyonori Sasaki
Original Assignee
Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=37744354&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=WO2007037528(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Priority claimed from JP2005284646A external-priority patent/JP4539517B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2006063251A external-priority patent/JP4524676B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2006081806A external-priority patent/JP4479684B2/en
Application filed by Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha filed Critical Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Publication of WO2007037528A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007037528A1/en
Publication of WO2007037528A9 publication Critical patent/WO2007037528A9/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/1752Mounting within the printer
    • B41J2/17523Ink connection
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17553Outer structure

Definitions

  • EP 0 478 244 A2 discloses an ink cartridge which has a project erroneous loading As disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No 2005- an ink jet recording apparatus in which a plurality of ink cartridges are pl with their wider surfaces lying down A container body of the ink cartrid surface formed with an ink supply port An ink supply needle provid recording apparatus is inserted into the ink supply port so that ink in the ca to the mkjet recording apparatus
  • the container body of the ink cartridg bag inside, communication between an inside and an outside of the ink bag seal supply lid
  • the seal supply lid includes a spring seat mside The s toward the seal supply lid by a spnng, and the seal supply lid and the spring with each other, thereby interrupting the communication
  • the spring seat is pressed in a directi urging direction, and an ink passage is provided
  • the ink supply port is formed in the first cartridge
  • Another-type of ink cartridge is provided with an ink supply outward from the first surface, and an ink supply port formed at an end portion.
  • the ink jet recording apparatus in which the ink cartridg mechanism using the urging fore is placed with its wider surface lying do liable to occur and the installation portion is liable to get soiled regardless ink cartridge
  • the invention is made to solve the above drawbacks, and has an o ink cartridge and an ink jet recording apparatus that can reduce ink runnin recording apparatus during installation and removal of the ink cartridge
  • the "case” of the invention is a thing designed to shap ink cartridge, and the ink chamber disposed inside the case may be defined the case
  • the "end surface” of the invention is not limited to just a thing c a surface
  • the end surface may include an area defined as an end of the ca
  • the position adjacent to the lower end of the case is belo of the case with respect to the vertical direction
  • the ink supply part has a valve an urging force
  • the lnkjet recording apparatus can be prevented from ge with ink because the ink runs onto the first projection
  • eve part projects outward from the end surface of the case, the first projecti outward than the ink supply part, and dirt due to ink can be reduced, irres cartridge shape
  • the first projection i when the ink cartridge is in the installation posture at least a part of the disposed on a line vertically passing through a center of the opening of th
  • the opening of th completely falls within an area occupied by the first projection when the i installation posture is viewed in a vertical direction
  • the first pr wider than the opening of the ink supply part with respect to the horizontal ink running from the opening of the ink supply portion can be reliably rece projection
  • the surface of t which faces the ink supply part is formed flat or recessed and can prevent the first projection from running further downward
  • the first projectio lower end of the case, and the ink supply part is disposed in a position close disposed at a lower end of the case, so that ink can be consumed well It is ink cartridge has the first projection disposed at the lower end of the case
  • the first projection at a lower portion when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet rec includes an inclined surface extending upward continuously from a bottom
  • the ink cartridge can be installed smoothly.
  • the first proj inclined surface when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording a portion of the first projection may collide with the insertion opening of th apparatus, and the ink cartridge may not be installed smoothly
  • the first projectio operate an installation detection switch disposed in the ink jet recording a ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording apparatus
  • the ins switch can be disposed inward, with respect to a direction where the ink car deeper than at least a place where ink is supplied If the installation d disposed toward the front, it may contact other elements of the ink cartridge, damaged and detection errors may occur as the installation switch can be occurrence of damage and detection errors can be
  • the first projection pr direction as the extracting member extends
  • the ink jet recording apparatus includes an accommodating space corresponding to a contour of the ink cartridge and configured t cartridge installed in a horizontal direction
  • this can prevent the pr of the extracting member and the first projection from deviating from installation and removal of the ink cartridge
  • ink running fr extracting member can be accurately received onto the first projection
  • the installation detect that the ink cartridge is installed when the installation detection device r installation detection switch has been operated and an amount of light that received has been changed, and the controlling device allows the recording recording when the installation detection device detects that the ink cart
  • installation detection is performed using a detection result of the ins switch and a detection result of the optical sensor, the reliability to detect the ink cartridge can be improved
  • the recording device does not when the ink cartridge is not installed, the occurrence of recording errors
  • FIG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the multi the present invention
  • FiG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit
  • FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill unit
  • FIG 4 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figure 2 alon FiG.
  • 5 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figure 2 alon FiG 6 is an exploded perspective view showing the door of the refill unit
  • FiG 7 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the color i
  • FIG. 8 is an angled diagram showing the details of the color ink cartridge
  • FiG 9 IS a diagram showing the protector, where (a) is a top-surface diagra in Figure 8 as seen from the IXa perspective, and (b) is a cross-se the protector in Figure 9(a) along the IXb-IXb line
  • FIG 10 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the black i
  • FIG 11 is an angled diagram showing the details of the black ink cartridge
  • FiG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large capacity black iG 14 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is a fro reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink reservoir element iG 15 IS a diagram showing the supply path formation part, where (a) is a summary of the supply path formation part (a side view of the fra cross-sectional diagram showing the supply path formation part in the XVb-XVb line, (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the IS a diagram showing the injection path formation part, where showing a summary of the injection path formation part, and (b) i diagram of the injection path formation part in Figure 17(a) along IS a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) is a di summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a cross-sectional diagra part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIb-XVIIIb line, and (c) is a
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the sensor arm, where (a) is a front view of t (b) is a diagram showing the sensor arm in Figure 19(a) along perspective is a diagram showing one part of the ink reservoir element, wher showing the side of the ink reservoir element, (b) is a diagram showi front of the ink reservoir element, and (c) is a cross-sectional diagra along the XXc-XXc line is a diagram showing the details of the ink reservoir element is an exploded diagram of the ink supply mechanism and the a mechanism, where (a) is an exploded diagram of the ink supply mec an exploded diagram of the ambient air intake mechanism is a diagram showing the supply cap, where (a) is a diagram showi supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surface of the supply c along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the pl supply cap, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the suppl cross-sectional diagram of the supply cap in
  • XXVId-XXVId line is a diagram showing the supply slider, where (a) is a diagram sh the supply slider, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the supply sli along the arrow XXVIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the the supply slider, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the (e) is a cross-sectional diagram of the supply slider in Figure XXVIIe-XXVIIe line is a diagram showing the valve seat, where (a) is a diagram showi valve seat, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the v diagram showing the bottom surface of the valve seat, and (d) is diagram of the valve seat in Figure 28(b) along the XXVIIId-XXVIII is a diagram showing the check valve, where (a) is a diagram show check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the ch diagram showing the bottom surface of the check valve, and (c) is diagram of the check valve in Figure
  • FIG. 30(b) along the XXXd-XXXd line. is a diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) is a diagram of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cross-sectional diagram of the ambient air joint in Figure XXXIId-XXXIId line.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a diagram s the ambient air valve, and (b) is a diagram showing the bottom surf air valve is a partial cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism have been asse supply unit and the ambient air intake unit is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes p ⁇ or to welding is a diagram showing the welding processes for the film, where showing the welding surface of the film onto the frame part, and showing the welding process to weld the film onto the frame part is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that are perfor welding, where (a) is a diagram showing the attachment process supply mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism onto the f diagram showing the pressure reducing process, and (c) is a diagra injection process is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, where showing the process to sandwich the frame part by the case, and showing the welding process to weld the case IS a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that are pe shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagram showing the pr protective cap
  • FiG 54 is an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge according to the embodiment
  • ⁇ G 55 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink cart the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the refill
  • FiG 56 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink cart the sixth example of embodiment has been attached within the refill
  • FiG 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the electrical structure o device according to the sixth example of embodiment
  • FiG 58 is a flowchart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection proce by the CPU
  • FiG 59 IS an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink cart the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment, where (a) is a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge according to th of embodiment, and (b) is an angled diagram showing the external ink cartridge according to the eighth example of embodiment.
  • FIG 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit according to of embodiment
  • FiG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink c to the tenth example of embodiment FiG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartridge acco example of embodiment
  • FIG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the ink reservo
  • FiG. 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to the ele reference to the attached drawings.
  • Figure 1 is an oblique view showing multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 of the present invention is i
  • Printer part 11 is provided on the lower part of multifunction device 1, a is provided on the upper part of this printer part 11 Multifunction device 1 Function Device) in which printer part 11 and scanner part 12 are provide has various functions such as a printer function, scanner function, co facsimile function
  • Multifunction device 1 is primarily connected to a computer (external in the figure), and it records images or documents to recording paper us medium based on image data or document data sent from this computer M 1 can also be connected to an external device such as a digital camera (no figure) such that it records image data outputted from the digital camera t Moreover, by using receiver 2, multifunction device 1 can communicate another party and send image data to the device of the other party Furtherm device 1 is equipped with slot part 23, which is described below, and by loa of recording media such as memory cards into this slot part 23, the devic such as image data recorded on the recording medium to recording paper
  • printer part 11 is configured as an inkjet rec refill unit 13, which stores ink that is supplied to a recording head (not figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is equipped at the base of th multifunction device 1
  • Refill unit 13 has a compact design and is config cartridge 14 can be easily replaced, and this will be described in detail belo
  • Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15, which functions as Scanner), and document cover 16, which is provided on the upper part of t 15 (top of figure 1)
  • Document cover 16 is equipped with automatic docu Auto Document Feeder; called “ADF” hereafter) 17, and it is attached to between the document bed and document cover 16, and it is equipped with unit (not illustrated in the figure) on the inside
  • a document is placed b cover 16 and the contact glass sheet, and the image reading unit reads document by moving along the contact glass sheet from the bottom of the co Document cover 16 is equipped with ADF 17, and this ADF 17 is conf dan consecutively feed up to a prescribed number of documents from do paper ejection tray 19
  • ADF 17 has a known structure, so its d will be omitted.
  • document cover 16 is opened by the us are placed on the contact glass sheet
  • Printer part 11 is equipped with an image recording part that has an inkj (not illustrated in the figure), and this is configured as an inkjet recording d 11 is equipped with refill unit 13 on the front side of multifunction devic Figure 1) and on the bottom side of multifunction device 1 (bottom side of words, refill unit 13 is built in to the front surface Ia side and the bottom multifunction device 1.
  • refill unit 13 is configured suc and hold four ink cartridges 14, and black, yellow, magenta, and cyan color each of these ink cartridges 14 The ink of each color stored in ink cartridge the recording head through ink tube 53 (see Figure 5) Moreover, opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes opening 21 of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure 1) is provided on t refill unit 13 (front of Figure 1) Opening/closing cover 20 is configured s freely rotated between a position in which it exposes refill unit 13 through position in which it closes opening 21 and houses refill unit 13 by folding i (front direction in Figure 1)
  • Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifunctio Operation panel 30 is attached to the top surface of the front surface sid device 1 (upper part of the front surface in Figure 1).
  • This operation panel part for the purpose of performing the operations of printer part 11 and sca is equipped with various operation keys 31-34 and liquid crystal display pa operation keys 31-34 arranged on operation panel 30 are connected to a c control circuit board, not illustrated in the figure) used as a control mea major functions through flat cables not illustrated in the Figure
  • the control device pro from receiver 2 described above and controls the operation of multifunction in cases in which a device such as a personal computer is connected to multi the control device controls the operation of multifunction device 1 based o from this personal computer in addition to the instructions from operation p
  • FIG 3 is a side view of the state in which door 41 o been opened
  • Figure 4 is a cross-sectional view of refill unit 13 through line and the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illustrated
  • Figure 5 i view of refill unit 13 through line V-V of Figure 2 and the state m which in installed is illustrated
  • Figure 6 is an exploded perspective view of door 41 Figures 3 and 4 illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is re
  • refill unit 13 is primarily equipped with case chamber 50 is formed such that it demarcates space corresponding to the o cartridge 14, and when each ink cartridge 14 is installed in case 40, it is h without rattling
  • case 40 is equipped with bottom plate part 4 43 that are provided on the left and right sides of this bottom plate part 42 on the back left side is not illustrated in Figure 2), and ceiling plate part 44 such that it spans the space between each side plate part 43, and the inside chambers 50 is further equipped with partition wall parts 47 (see Figure each accommodating chamber 50
  • the number of these partition wall pa determined by the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in case 40, and the they are arranged are determined by the thicknesses of ink cartridges 14 m t
  • partition walls 47 are formed in a rib shape pro and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44 Further, parti do not need to completely partition each accommodating chamber 50, so t shape as long as the shape protrudes to the inside from at least one of botto ceiling plate part 44 and divides the space between adjacent accommodating
  • cutout part 40a opening part formed on the back side of case 40 (back right side of Figure 2), and needl 48 is fitted into this cutout part 40a.
  • Needle 49 (extraction member) th inside ink cartridges 14 is formed on needle forming member 48 based on cartridges 14 housed in accommodating chambers 50 of case 40
  • needle 49 extends along the direction of ope and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installation direction) in needle forming member 48 is engaged with cutout part 40a
  • this needle 49 is inserted into i (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge 14, and an ink supply path is formed as sup of case 40, which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure 5)
  • ambient air corresponding to passes through passage 54 and is supplied into ink cartridges 14
  • protrusion 55 that projects to the ink cartridge 14 side (left si formed on the top of passage 54.
  • This protrusion 55 is a guide protrusion case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 described below (see Figure 8) More cartridge 14 is about to be installed upside-down, the upside-down inserti 14 is prevented by this protrusion 55.
  • a detailed description of this backwards insertion of ink cartridge 14 is given below.
  • a detailed descript structure of ink cartridge 14 is also given below
  • remaining ink detection sensor 57 which of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge 14, is provided and passage 54
  • This remaining ink detection sensor 57 is a transmissive has light emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b, and it is provide number of ink cartridges 14 housed in accommodating chambers 50
  • Remai sensor 57 is provided in a position corresponding to detection part 140 (se cartridge 14 in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accom 50, and it is arranged in a position in which light emitting part 57a and li 57b can sandwich both sides of detection part 140 of ink cartridge accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detect connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink stored in eac is constantly monitored by this control device
  • Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves the ri Further, ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm mechanism 44b attached between swing arm mechanism 44b and ceiling plate part 44 mechanism 44b is always elastically biased in the direction of door 41 chambers 50 In other words, each accommodating chamber 50 is succ inside case 40 on each opening 45, and the four ink cartridges 14 are respec and removed from each accommodating chamber 50 through openings 45
  • Door 41 opens and closes opening 45, and is provided on each openin of door 41 switches between a position in which it closes opening 45 (bl with the 1 st , 3 rd and 4 th door 41 from the back in figure 2 and a position opening 45 (open position), as with the 2 nd door 41 from the back left opemng 45 can thereby be opened and closed
  • a position in which it closes opening 45 (bl with the 1 st , 3 rd and 4 th door 41 from the back in figure 2
  • a position opening 45 opening 45 (open position)
  • door 41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61 that i door main body 60, door lock member 62 (lock bar) that fastens (locks) d and lock release lever 63 that releases door 41 from the fastened state D pressing retaining member 61, door lock member 62, and lock release molded using resins
  • door main body 60 is roughly formed into a of a long and thin rectangle
  • the external shape of door main body 60 is fo the shape of opening 45 of case 40
  • Rotating shaft part 64 which is supp part of the front surface of case 40, is formed on the bottom end of do
  • bearing part 42a is formed o bottom plate part 42 of case 40 (see Figures 2, 3, and 4), and rotating sha into this bearing part 42a such that it can rotate freely As a result, door close opening 45 by standing up or open opening 45 by folding over
  • Pullout member 65 which is formed as a unit with door mam body 60, chamber 50 (bottom surface inside accommodating chamber 50 that make bottom surface of ink cartridge 14, see Figure 4)
  • Door main body 60 rotat shaft part 64 as a rotational center, and as a result, pullout member 65 th L-shape also rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational cente changes to the open position (state illustrated in Figure 3), curved part 65b #5 rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational center
  • rotation of curved part 65b, outer wall surface 65c changes from a state roughly perpendicularly (state illustrated in Figure 4) to a roughly hori illustrated in Figure 3)
  • the length of extension part 65a of pullout mem prescribed dimension so when curved part 65b is rotated, outer wall surf higher than installation surface 51 of case 40 and is roughly parallel to instal
  • Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides ink installation surface 51 inside accommodating chamber 50 in the state in w the open position
  • pullout member 65 functions not only as a ink cartridge 14 out of accommodating chamber 50, but also as a guidi inserting ink cartridge 14 into accommodating chamber 50
  • pullout members 65 are provided on each door other words, pullout members 65 are configured such that they are positi width direction of door main body 60 and support ink cartridge 14 by san width direction Moreover, in this embodiment, the spacing between ea members 65 is set to be smaller than the width direction of ink cartridge 14
  • Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member 61 suc to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodating part 60a, in housed, is provided on door main body 60 Claw accommodating part 60a i a groove that extends in a direction that is roughly perpendicular to the lon of door mam body 60 (vertical direction in Figure 6) Claw 61a is Figure 4) Moreover, coil spring 66 is placed between pressing retaining me main body 60 Therefore, pressing retaining member 61 is elastically bia always in the projected position
  • pressing retaining member 61 is formed in the sh while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 61 (surface that the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when door 41 is in the blocked position flat surface, and a pair of projecting strips 61c is formed on this wall surfa when door 41 is in the blocked position, these strips 61c make contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14
  • pressing retaining member 61 is configured such that, wh position, it presses slightly downward from the center position in the vertic cartridge 14 (vertical direction in Figure 4)
  • pressing retain provided in a position in which it makes contact and presses downwar position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14
  • pressing retain provided in a position in which it makes contact and presses downwar position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14
  • the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of loc so the distance between the part that is operated by the user and the member 61 becomes small Therefore, the force induced by coil sprin 14, it presses against the end of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 somet accommodating chamber 50, making it unable to hold ink cartridge 14 corr this embodiment
  • pressing retaining member 61 is positioned slightly position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 c held correctly and can be installed smoothly with a small amount of forc below the center position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 means the vertical
  • Door lock member 62 is supported such that it can advance and retr direction with respect to door main body 60 (vertical direction in Figure extends in the vertical direction on the top end of door main body 60. Slide extends in the vertical direction, is provided on main shaft part 62a of door Slide rail 60b of door main body 60 is inserted into this slide groove 6 member 62 is configured such that it can freely slide up and down
  • Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key part 62b 62a
  • claw 62e accommodating part 60c provided on door main body 60
  • This claw accom is configured from a groove that extends to exactly a prescribed leng direction Therefore, when door lock member 62 slides upward or downwar contact with the inside wall surface of claw accommodating part 60c, and t lock member 62 in the vertical direction is thus restricted
  • the sliding range of door lock member 62 is defined as a result of the se of the groove that constitutes claw accommodating part 60c to a prescribed door lock member 62 slides upward with respect to door main body 60 an contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw accommodati lock member 62 is in the position in which it projects upward from the main body 60
  • door lock member 62 slides downward with respect t 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the bottom edge of the inside wal accommodating part 60c
  • door lock member 62 is in the position in whic inside of door main body 60
  • the position at which doo makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw accomm defined as the "projected position”
  • the position at which door lock The top surface of key part 62b of door lock member 62 is a sloped s downward Therefore, when door 41 changes from the open position to the the top surface of door lock member 62 makes contact with the top edge of 40, and when door 41 is rotated towards the blocked position, door lock me the inside of door mam body
  • door lock member 62 is in a state in whi lock member fitting part 46 (see Figures 2 and 5), which is provided o opening 45 of case 40
  • Door lock member 62 is elastically biased such that from door main body 60 due to coil spring 67, so it is pressed inside lock 46, but the position of door lock member 62 is an intermediate position s slightly more to the retreated position side than the projecting side Door l always elastically pressed against lock member fitting part 46 when it is i position, so door lock member 62 never easily deviates from lock member fi
  • Lock release lever 63 is formed into the shape of a rectangular plate, a the top of the outside of door main body 60 in a state in which it is fastene main body 60 is equipped with accommodating part 6Od, which houses loc This accommodating part 6Od consists of a concave part that is provided o 60 This will be described below, and when lock release lever 63 chang release lever 63 is fitted into accommodating part 6Od.
  • Supporting pin 63 a is provided on the bottom end of lock release leve time, pin support hole 6Oe, into which supporting pin 63 a is fitted, is provi body 60 Because supporting pin 63a is fitted into this pin support hole 6Oe, 63 is configured such that it can rotate freely around the rotational center "housed position", and the position of lock release lever 63 when lock r inclined at approximately 45° is defined as the "neutral position", while th release lever 63 when it is folded over roughly horizontally is define position"
  • the bottom end of lock release lever 63 is interlocking cam 63b, and int is for sliding door lock member 62 up and down when the position of loc changes Because interlocking cam 63b is provided, when lock release l from the housed position, through the neutral position, and to the folded p member 62 slides from the projected position, through the intermediate p retreated position Put the other way around, when door lock member 62 i position, lock release lever 63 is placed in the housed position and door 4 the state in which door lock
  • lock release lever 63 will be descr cam 63b of lock release lever 63 makes contact with seat part 62c of door lo the state in which door 41 is closed (state illustrated in Figure 4), lock attempts to further rotate door lock member 62 through interlocking cam pressing downward
  • door lock member 62 is always elastically coil spring 67, so door lock member 62 is not displaced by the action of t release lever 63 alone, and door lock member 62 is maintained in the interm
  • lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for examp which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates and rotates lock blocked position to the open position
  • Door lock member 62 constantly receives the elastic force of coil sp rotational force that acts upon lock release lever 63 disappears - in other releases his or her hand from lock release lever 63 - door lock memb position in which it projects most from door main body 60, and lock r forcibly displaced to the housed position
  • door 41 when door 41 is in lock release lever 63 is in the position in which it is almost completely h main body 60, rotating is possible with rotati the center of rotation to the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so t replace ink cartridge 14
  • the two strips 61c that are provided on pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing ink c accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation with a guide part between cu other words, when ink cartridge 14 is to be inserted into accommodating par load the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14 onto strips 61c, place the tip pa 14 between curved parts 65b, and then press ink cartridge 14 in accommodating chamber 50 Further, when
  • Ink cartridges 14 that are used in this embodiment will be descri to Figures 7 to 13
  • Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of storing ink in a magenta, yellow, and black colored ink is stored in each ink cartridge 1 regard to the structure of each ink cartridge 14, ink cartridge 14 that stores b such that it is slightly thicker than the ink cartridges 14 that store the other is because the demand for black ink is generally the highest and it is quantities and because black ink consists of pigmented inks, while color dyed inks, so when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities o be expended for the recovery process Therefore, the external shape of the b into a large shape such that colored ink and black ink can be visually con the structures of ink cartridges 14 that store colored inks are all formed into
  • Figure 7 is an oblique view showing the external appearanc cartridge 14
  • Figure 8 is an exploded oblique view of the colored ink cartrid a diagram showing protector 300
  • (a) is a top surface view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8
  • (b) is a cross-sectional view of prot line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a)
  • the X-direct longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir e Y-direction indicates the height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink 100), which is orthogonal to the X-direction
  • the Z-direction indicates t (thickness direction) of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir eleme ink cartridge 14 is fed
  • case 200 is formed parallelepiped that contains a pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a that o (cases 1200 and 2200 explained below are the same
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipp 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores ink (inner space a including ink reservoir chamber 111), ink supply part 120, which supplies frame part 110 to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), ambient air intak introduces ambient air into frame part 110, detection part 140 (irradiat provided in order to detect the amount of remaining ink stored inside fr dispensing part 150, which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 16 to both sides of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8) i ink reservoir chamber on frame part 110
  • detection part 140 irradiat provided in order to detect the amount of remaining ink stored inside fr dispensing part 150, which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 16 to both sides of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8)
  • frame part 110 in ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, ink dispensing part 150, an manufacturing process for ink reservoir element 100 will be given below.
  • Case 200 comprises two case elements 210 and 220 that sandwich ink 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8, Z-direction)
  • First is a member that covers the bottom side surface of ink reservoir element 10
  • second case element 220 is a member that covers the top side surface of ink 100 in Figure 8
  • First and second case members 210 and 220 are made of r are manufactured using injection molding The depths of first and second and 220 (lengths in the upward direction of Figure 8 (lengths in the Z-dire such that they are roughly equivalent, and they are formed such that the sum vertical wall parts 210b-210e that are provided in roughly orthogonal d directions and Z-direction in Figure 8) from the outer edge portions of the plate-shaped part Regarding vertical wall parts 210d-210e, the vertical protector 300 side of first case member 210 is 210b, the vertical wall that this vertical wall part 210b is 210c, and the vertical walls that are respecti vertical wall parts 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe Figure
  • Case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing ink su ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 are formed on vertical first case member 210
  • Case cutout parts 211 and 212 arc formed into ro shapes from the edges of vertical wall part 210b, and case cutout part 211 side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ink supply part 120, while ca on the left back side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ambient ai Rectangular case cutout part 213, which is cut out into a rectangular shape, i case cutout part 211 and case cutout part 212, and this is a cutout for insert detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) to the position at which it sandwiches d
  • Contact groove 211a which makes contact with ink supply part 120, is for surface connecting to case cutout part 211 of first case member 210, and co which makes contact with ambient air intake part 130, is formed on t connecting to case cutout part 212 of first case member 210 Because thes 212a and 212b are
  • case projecting parts 214a and 214b which project i protector 300 (left front direction and X-direction in Figure 8) from the surf cutout parts 211-213 are formed (vertical wall part 210b), are formed on 210
  • Case projecting parts 214a and 214b are formed on both sides of first of vertical wall part 21Od of the case member 210 (protector 300 direction, in Figure 8)
  • case projecting cutout part 214al On case projecting part 214a, case projecting cutout part 214al, whic rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms the side of cas to 213
  • Case projecting cutout part 214bl, w into a rectangular shape is also formed on the inside surface that forms the parts 211 to 213
  • case projecting cutout parts 214al and 214bl are pr prevent the natural desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protect to case 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which below, are fitted into these parts (see Figure 9).
  • case fitting groove 214b2 which is used as a fitting part into w fitting part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) described below, is formed part 214b This case fitting groove 214b2 is formed across a portion of verti from the edge of case projecting part 214b (edge of the protector 300 side)
  • rod member 215a which protrudes in the direction of second (Z-direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on the ink supply p front side of Figure 8) and determines the position of ink reservoir element case 200
  • rod members 215b and 215c which protrude in the directi member 220 (Z-direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Oe on the part 130 side (left back side of Figure 8) and determine the position of ink sealed inside case 200, are formed on first case member 210
  • the positio element 100 is determined by the three locations of these rod members 215 placed opposite this vertical wall part 220b is 220c, and the vertical walls th connected to vertical wall parts 220c and 220b are vertical wall parts 22Od side of Figure 8 is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is 22Od)
  • Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure that is roughly s case member 210 As with first case member 210, three case cutout par formed on vertical wall part 220
  • first case member 210 and second case ember 22 formed into roughly the same shapes, and when they are in the state in w reservoir element 100, roughly circular through-holes that expose a portion 120 to the outside are formed by case cutout parts 211 and 221, while prevention of the installation of the cartridge into refill unit 13 in the wron prevention of the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake par case projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a, and a protrusion ( part", or "one projecting part") that cont ⁇ butes to the prevention of th installation in the wrong position together with the protrusion that is projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a and the prevention of th such as ink supply part 120 is formed by case projecting part 214b and c 224b.
  • cl ink supply part 120 is positioned closer to the protrusion formed from ca 214a and case projecting part 224a than the protrusion formed by case pr and case projecting part 224b
  • a through-hole into which projecting part 3 300 (see Figure 9) is loosely inserted is formed by case projecting cutou 224al
  • a through-hole into which projecting part 330bl of protector 30 loosely inserted is formed by case projecting cutout parts 214bl and 224 groove in the shape of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped into which fir part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is fitted is formed by case fitting g 224b2
  • first case member 210 and sec 220 do not only have the same overall external appearance, but they are details such as case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b and case c 213 and 221 to 223 also have the same shapes Therefore, when first case second case member 220 are resin-molded, their die shapes are similar, s with die design can be reduced
  • case 200 On first and sec 210 and 220, vertical wall parts 210d, 21Oe, 22Od, and 22Oe (side surfaces directions (Y-direction) that are orthogonal to longitudinal direction 226, and the step portions on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left b 8) are second case welded parts 217 and 227
  • longitudinal direction B of first and sec 210 and 220 refers to the longitudin cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction or ink reservoir element 100, an direction of case 200
  • first and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second case 220 First case welded part 226 is connected to case projecting part 224a in the s the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, it has concave part 226a, whi concave shape in the direction of the inside of second case member 220, an 226b that engages with pullout member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when removed from refill unit 13 (see Figure 1)
  • Concave part 226a is a regio oscillating range when pullout member 65 rotates
  • Case welded part 227 h which is formed into a concave shape in roughly intermediate positio direction B of second case member 220
  • this latch part 227a is a part swing arm mechanism 44b (see Figure 2) in the state in which it is installed
  • protector 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 an diagram that shows protector 300, and Figure 9(a) is a top view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while Figure 9(b) is a cross-sectional vie through line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a)
  • Protector 300 is a member for protecti 120 and ambient air intake part 130, in particular, of ink reservoir elem through-hole 310 is formed in order to protect this valve open part 721a
  • first protector fitting part 3 into the fitting groove formed by case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 formed in the vicinity of the end of the side of protector through-hole 31 (left side in Figure 9(a)).
  • Second protector fitting part 330a which through-hole formed by case projecting cutout parts 214al and 224al ( fastens protector 300 to case 200, is formed in the vicinity of the end of th the side on which first protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in second protector fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through-hol projecting cutout holes 214bl and 224b 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protecto is provided between first protector fitting part 320 and protector through-hol
  • protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b which are li the through-holes formed by case cutout parts 213 and 223 and the side wal 140 (see Figure 8), are formed in roughly intermediate positions in longitud protector 300 (Y-direction in Figures 8 and 9)
  • Protector loose insertion pa are connected to both side walls formed parallel to longitudinal direction side walls in Figure 9(a)), and they are formed such that they project upwa the front side of the page in Figure 9(a) and on the side of ink reservoir ele 8).
  • Multiple ribs are formed from the bottom surface of protector 300, and t the strength of protector 300
  • First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends in a dir direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (vertical 9(a), X-direction), and consists of protector vertical wall 321 provided fro of protector 300 and two protector vertical walls 322 that are connected to t opposite side as protector through-hole 310 from protector vertical wall Figure 9(a)) As illustrated in Figure 9(b), each protector vertical wall 322 inserted into the fitting groove When first protector fitting part 320 is inser groove, it is inserted as it is restricted by both ends of protector vertical extends in the Z-direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C (Y-directio protector vertical wall 322 in longitudinal direction C
  • first protect is formed with roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by ca 214b2 and 224b2 (see Figure 8)
  • the attachment of protector 300 takes time protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the fitting gr of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot be determined Howe inserted as it is restricted by protector vertical walls 321 and 322 at one surf protector vertical wall
  • protruding parts 330al and 330bl are formed on the edges of second protector fitting parts the direction in which second protector fitting parts 330a and 330b mutual on the top side of Figure 9(b)), and shaft parts 330a2 and 330b2, whic roughly cylindrical shapes, are formed in the direction of the bottom surfac from these edges (downward in Figure 9(b)) Shaft parts 330a2 and 330 because protector 300 is formed from a resin material, and protector 30 removed as second protector fitting parts 330a and 330b are elastically defo direction
  • black ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to Figures 10 is an oblique view that shows the external appearance of black ink cartri is an exploded oblique view of black ink cartridge 14
  • black ink cartridge 14 is config external profile is larger (the thickness (length in the Z-direction) is lar it is formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z-direction) t Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regard to first case descriptions of second case member 220, ink reservoir element 100, and p be omitted here Only the depth of first case member 1210 (the thickness of (length of Z-direction) in Figure 11) the differs from that of first case me rest of its configuration is the same, so it detailed description will be omitte
  • first case member 1210 comprises a plat forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe tha roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Z-direction in Figure edge portions of the four sides of this plate-shaped part Regarding vertica to 121Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 1300 side of first cas 1210b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b vertical walls that are respectively connected to vertical wall parts 121 vertical wall parts 121Od and 121Oe (the right side of Figure 11 is vertica and the left side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121Od) Black ink cartr such that the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe are vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 210e of first case memb ink, and the thickness of ink cartridge 14 is accordingly increased
  • case cutout parts 1211 and 1212 whic roughly semicircular shapes on vertical wall part 1210b, are formed on 1210 m order to expose ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 13 case 200, and case cutout part 1213, which is cut out into a rectangular between case cutout part 1211 and case cutout part 1212
  • Two case projectin 1214b are formed on both sides of first case member 1210, and case projecti sloping surface 1214a2
  • Rod members 1215a, 1215b and 1215c which dete of ink reservoir element 100, are formed on first case member 1210 between ink reservoir element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled. It is th maintain the strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
  • black ink cartridge 14 l colored ink cartridge 14
  • black ink other ink cartridges 14 Black is a darker color than other colors, so it is not be mistakenly loaded into refill unit 13 and used
  • accommodating chamber 5 13 is formed according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, so black ink ca installed into accommodating chamber 50 corresponding to a colored ink ca
  • the external profile of large-c cartridge 14 is configured such that it is larger (longer in the Z-direction) black ink cartridges 14
  • the vertical wall heights of vertical w 222Oe of second case member 2220 are formed such that they are roughly wall heights of vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of second case member 220 member 2220, which constitutes case 2200, is simply made thicker than sec 220 for colored and black ink
  • rib 1218 of first case member 1210 for black ink is simply remo supply part 2120, ambient air supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 ar center position in the vertical direction
  • refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 Corresponding to ink cartridges with the three types of sizes desc desirable for refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 to be configured such with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house cored ink cartridg Accommodating chamber 50 that selectively houses black ink cartridge 14 black ink cartridge 14 (the inner space of this accommodating chamb corresponding to large-capacity black ink cartridge 14) This is because the printing using only black ink is generally higher than that of color printing of multifunction device 1 in which refill unit 13 is configured such that i multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house colored ink cartridges accommodating chamber 50 that houses black ink cartridge 14 may be prov infrequently use text printing This will be described once again below
  • ink reservoir element 100 will be described with reference to Figu a diagram that shows ink reservoir element 100, and Figure 14(a) is a reservoir element 100, while Figure 14(b) is a back view of ink reservoir state of ink reservoir element 100 illustrated in Figure 14 is the position in 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1).
  • F position in which the longitudinal direction (X-direction) and the width dire of ink cartridge 14 (ink reservoir element 100) are horizontal directions, which ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, and detection part on the side surface, ink supply part 120 is positioned on the bottom part sid intake part 130 is positioned on the ceiling side
  • Ink reservoir element 210 reservoir element 100 only with regard to its thickness (length in the X detailed description will be omitted here
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipped wi surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 are par largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded into case 200 Mo welded to both the front surface side and the back surface side of fram thickness of ink reservoir element 100 (length in the Z-direction), which is shape, can be reduced in comparison to the case in which both sides are materials
  • Frame part 110 is injection molding using a resin material, and it has translucence because translucent (or transparent). This is because, as described below, light th light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 positioned detection part 140 is transmitted to light receiving part 57b in order to det remaining ink in ink reservoir element 100
  • the blackened ed inner circumference welded parts (ribs or first ribs) 411a to 417a illustrat are welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or first rib fixed parts), and the front (blackened portion) of outer circumference welded part 400a is the welded part) on the periphery of first opening 112a.
  • Film 160 is welded to this weld ultrasonic welding
  • outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b constit chamber 111 in which ink is stored
  • the region on the front surface side ill 14(a) is first chamber Il ia of ink reservoir chamber 111, and the region o side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second chamber 111b of ink reserv
  • outer circumference welded part 400a illustrated in Figure 14( 112a of frame part 110, and outer circumference welded part 400b illustrat is second opening 112b of frame part 110
  • Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 420 (see 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 and supplies ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside, ambient air communicating passage (see Figure 14(a)), which communicates with ambient air intake part 13 ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111, plate-shaped link forming part 14(a) and 14(b)), which is formed in roughly the center of frame part 110 chamber 111) and connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 to t dispensing part 150, and dispensing passage forming part 450 (see Fig communicates with ink dispensing part 150 and dispenses ink into ink reser
  • link forming part 440 partitions first chamber Ilia and second cha reservoir chamber 111 in a state in which they communicate with one a linking plate that is between virtual plane R (not illustrated in the figure), i that is welded to outer circumference welded part 400a extends, and vir illustrated in the figure), in which film 160 that is welded to outer circumfe 400b extend
  • thin plate-shaped pr formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Figure 14(a) a Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top part of Figure 14( Figure 14(b)), and through-holes 460a to 460c, into which rod members Figure 8) of first case member 210 described above are inserted, are protruding parts
  • Inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a consist of in welded part 411a, which is provided on supply path forming part 420, in welded part 412a, which is provided on ambient air communicating passage and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 417a, which are provided on 440 Moreover, the welded surface parts of inner circumference welded part positioned on the same virtual plane as the welded surface part of outer circ part 400a, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane R)
  • Inner circumference welded part 411a is provided on supply path formi consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction th longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (see Figure 8, left/right directio Inner circumference welded part 412a forms one side wall (vertical wal connection passage 433, which will be described below, in ambient ai (vertical direction in Figure 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are Inner circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudinal directi 110, a vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a directio orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, and a downwa wall that slopes from this vertical wall in a direction that intersects with lon B of frame part 110
  • Inner circumference welded part 415a consists of a v parallel to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, a vertical wall th perpendicularly such that it faces the direction of the bottom part of frame vertical
  • inner circumfer 411a to 417a extends in a direction that slopes downward or is roug longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (in other words, the bottom reservoir chamber 111 in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installe this bottom part side (bottom part side in Figure 14(a)) is a free end
  • these multiple inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a are provided on t circumference welded part 400a in order to suppress the slackening of fil 160 is to be welded to frame part 110
  • these multiple inner circumference formed with roughly the same shapes as inner circumference welded pa circumference welded parts 413a to 417a descnbed above and in position those of inner circumference welded part 411a and inner circumference we 417a, and only inner circumference welded part 412b is formed with a diffe different position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a
  • Mo surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are positi virtual plane
  • Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumference which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumference wel direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame par and inner circumference welded part 412b2, which likewise consists of a extends from outer circumference welded part 400b in a direction that is r to longitudinal direction B [of frame part 110]
  • Inner circumference weld inner circumference welded part 412b2 are provided from plate part 438, ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 This is bec communicating passage forming part 430 is formed only on the front sur part 110, and inner circumference welded part 412bl and inner circumfe 412b2 are provided in order to suppress the generation of slack in film 1 corresponding to the back surface side of this ambient air communicatin part 430 Moreover, as with the front surface side, inner circumference we 417b become free ends and are spread around on the back surface side of well (scattered in multiple units), so they efficiently reduce the inhibition suppressing the generation of s
  • supply path forming part 420 will be described with reference to 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420
  • Figure 15 (a) is a d the outline of supply path forming part 420 (diagram of the back surface liO)
  • Figure 15(b) is a diagram that shows a cross-sectional view of supply 420 through line XVb-XVb in Figure 15(a)
  • Figure 15(c) is a diagram that which the amount of remaining ink has decreased
  • Figure 15(d) is a d the state in which the supply of ink has been completed
  • supply path forming part 420 is primar first supply communicating hole 421, which communicates with ink suppl partition wall 422, which is formed into a roughly triangular frame when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 15 (a) such that it enclose communicating hole 421, plate part 427, which covers the region on th partition wall 422 and extends parallel to virtual planes R and S between t supply communicating hole 423, which is formed as a
  • supply partition wall 422 is formed suc 160 is to be welded, it separates the inside of frame part 110 (ink reservoir first supply communicating hole 421
  • ink supply chamber 4 by supply partition wall 422 communicates with the inside of frame part second supply communicating hole 423
  • ink that is stored mside supplied into ink supply chamber 426 from second supply communicating p is then supplied to ink supply part 120 from first supply communicatin illustrated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) (ink flow path))
  • ink flow path D through which ink inside frame part 110 is supp part 120, will be described with reference to Figures 15(c) and 15(d)
  • recessed space 424a is the mside of ink supply chamber 426 that is enclosed by supply partition shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) is inserted into first supp hole 421 Therefore, taking into consideration the space occupied by ink s 500 and check valve 670, there is a limit to the formation of first supply co 421 on the bottom side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (frame part 110)
  • supply partition wall 422 is not provided, when liquid surface I of th first supply communicating hole 421, it becomes impossible to supply the i of the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 becomes poor However, by sup partition wall 422 and forming second
  • a difference of distance tl is provided b that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber 111 in outer circumfe 400b and the lower end of second supply communicating hole 423
  • communicating hole 423 is above part 400bl that forms the bottom par chamber 111, additional ink cannot be supplied after liquid surface I of the i supply communicating hole 423, so the full use of the ink becomes poor concave part 424 is provided, and it is configured such that second communi positioned lower than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoi distance tl.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram that shows ambient air com forming part 430
  • Figure 16(a) is an oblique view that shows the outli communicating passage forming part 430
  • Figure 16(b) is a diagram that communicating passage forming part 430 from the perspective of arrow XV
  • Figure 16(c) is a diagram that shows ambient air communicating pas 430 from the perspective of arrow XVIc in Figure 16(a)
  • ambient air communicating passage fo primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating chamber 431 , whi roughly rectangular parallelepiped that communicates with ambient air 431 and second ambient air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air c 433 are formed as film 160 is welded on the front side of Figure 16(a)
  • First ambient air communicating hole 434 which communicates with part 130, is formed on the side of second surface 437b that opposes first su ambient air communicating chamber 431 (second surface 437b is the surfac described above)
  • second ambient air communicating chamber 432 s communicating hole 435, which communicates with first chamber Il i chamber 111, is formed on the side of first surface 437a
  • third ambient hole 436 which communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoi formed on second surface 437b (plate part 438)
  • First ambient air communi formed on side wall surface 431a of first ambient air communicating chamb of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side in Figure 16), and communica is formed on side wall surface 432a of second ambient air communicating c side of first ambient air communicating chamber 431 (left back side i described above, one of the side walls of ambient air connection passage 43 lower side in Figure 16(a)) is inner circumference welded part 412a
  • communicating openings 433a communicate with first ambient air communicating chamber 431 and se communicating chamber 432, respectively, are formed on the side of first these communicating openings 433a ⁇ and 433b have opening areas that smaller than the side wall areas of first ambient air communicating chamb ambient air communicating chamber 432 (side wall surfaces 431a an communicating opemngs 433a and 433b are formed) Because a part havi introduces ambient air with extremely small cross-sectional area (ambie passage 433) is provided (so-called labyrinth), the resistance of the flow p air passes through becomes large. As a result, it is possible to reduce the ev naturally returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 due to gravity.
  • ambient air connection passage 433 More cross-sectional area of ambient air connection passage 433 is made small, ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection p reduced
  • ambient air connection passage 433 slopes dow penetrates into the passage
  • the ink is returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 of meniscuses can be substantially prevented
  • ambient air connecti formed as a result of the welding of film 160 so at least one of the surfaces can be deformed by bending
  • ambient air connectio configured such that its cross-sectional area changes easily Therefore, e forms, the meniscus can be easily broken due to the bending and deformatio so ambient air can be introduced normally
  • a portion of the surface of s communicating hole 435 is also formed by film 160, so the formation second ambient air communicating hole 435 can be substantially prevented
  • Third ambient air communicating hole 436 is formed on the upperm ambient air communicating chamber 432 in the position in which ink cartri in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1) (state illustrated in Figure 16(a)) cases in which an amount of ink is stored such that a meniscus is formed o air communicating hole 435 and second ambient air communicating hol ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink reservoir chamber 111 thro air communicating hole 436
  • case 200 of ink cartridge 14 is formed into a cubic shape c largest surfaces that oppose one another, so when this is loaded onto a flat be case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connecti positioned on the lower side (the side of first chamber Ilia of frame part 11 and first surface 437a is the lower side), and Figure 16(c) shows the c cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positi side (the side of second chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side a 437b is the lower side)
  • connection passage 433 communicates through communicating opening markedly smaller area than the side surface of second ambient air comm 432, so there are cases in which the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 do pass through ambient air communicating chamber 433 and penetrate into communicating chamber 431
  • liquid s has not reached the position of the opening of first ambient air communic even if ink cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage on the lower side, the efflux of ink from ambient air intake part 130 to t prevented
  • connection passage 433 when ink cartridge 14 is placed such connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side during the feeding o the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows into second ambient a chamber 432, but liquid surface I of the ink does not reach the op communicating opening 433b of ambient air connection passage 433 As a r not flow into ambient air connection passage 433 from communicating ope 434 and the opening position of communicating opening 433b in symmetrical to ambient air connection passage 433, it is possible to prevent from ambient air intake part 130 Further, by making the cross-sectional a connection part 433 small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink flow of ink into first ambient air communicating chamber 431.
  • Link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to Figure 14 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 and ink dispensing reservoir chamber 111, and it is formed in roughly the center positio chamber 111. Therefore, link forming part 440 connects two locations that 110, so it is also a reinforcement member that maintains the strength of fra forming part 440 is also a divider plate that divides the chamber such th opening 112a and the side of second opening 112b are in roughly the sa (divider plate that divides first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111 chamber 111 in the state in which they communicate with one another)
  • Link forming part 440 consists of ambient air side linking part 441, wh the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left side in Figure 14(a) or right sid using inner circumference welded parts 415a and 415b as boundaries, an linking part 442, which is provided on the side of ink dispensing part 150 (r 14(a) or left side in Figure 14(b)) On ambient air side linking part 441,
  • communicating holes 443-446 are not formed on linking forming part 440, and second chamber 111b do not communicate in the center region of ink 111, so slight differences sometimes arise in the amounts of ink in first second chamber 111b If there are differences in the amounts of ink in first second chamber 111b, differences arise in the air pressure inside ink reser so the adverse effect that ink cannot be smoothly (or accurately) supplied ar forming linking communicating holes 443-446 such they are spread across 440, it is possible to make the amounts of ink in first chamber Ilia and sec equivalent and to supply ink smoothly (or accurately)
  • the part enclosed by ambient air side linking part 441, dispensing side and ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 is first reservoir opening 113, which communicates between first chamber Ilia and
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram that shows dispensing passage forming part 450 diagram that shows the outline of dispensing passage forming part 450, an cross-sectional view of dispensing passage forming part 450 through line Figure 17(a)
  • dispensing passage forming part 450 in the position dispensed, it is in the highest part inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and flows downward in the direction of ink supply part 120 and ambient air inta
  • dispensing passage forming part 450 is p with dispensing cylinder part 451, which is formed into a roughly cyli which ink dispensing plug 520 (see Figure 21), which will be described belo dispensing communicating hole 452, which communicates between this di part 451 and the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111, roughly U-shaped di wall 453, which is provided from the outer surface of dispensing cylinder the provided edge forms the forms the welded surface part on which film 1 partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect to ink reser and second dispensing communicating hole 454, which forms the opening partition wall 453
  • the opened part of dispensing cylinder part 451 is openi formed on the outside end surface of frame part 110, and the surface that op 451a is bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451
  • the regio dispensing partition wall 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow
  • Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference welded p chamber 111, ink is dispensed in a state in which second dispensing comm is positioned on top and first dispensing communicating hole 452 is posi (position in which the Y-direction is the horizontal direction in Figure 17( sequentially passes through dispensing cylinder part 451 , first dispensing co 452, dispensing partition wall flow path 453a and second dispensing comm and the ink is dispensed until liquid surface I of the ink reaches the state ill 17(a) Dispensing partition wall 453 is formed roughly linearly fro communicating hole 452 to second dispensing communicating hole 454 dispensed smoothly without resistance When ink is dispensed such that the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 volume of ink expands and film 160 is damaged or deformed by the bo cartridge 14 is placed If film 160 is damaged, the ink leaks, and if film volume inside ink reservoir chamber 111 changes, making it impossible to Therefore, in order to prevent the damage and
  • the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber dispensed is lower than the ambient pressure Therefore, a subsequent deco in which the pressure is reduced by aspirating the ambient air inside ink 111 from dispensing passage forming part 450 is sometimes performed Th order to reduce the amount of ambient air inside ink reservoir chamber 11 degree of deaeration of the ink and to reduce the generation of air bubbles deaeration of the ink is for the purpose of maintaining the viscosity of th constant level, and this is because, regarding the generation of air bubbl when air bubbles are supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), the to discharge the ink is not transmitted to the discharge opening (not illustra so the ink cannot be correctly discharged communicating hole 454 is placed above (upper side m Figure 17(a)) liqu ink (or first dispensing communicating hole 452), there is an amount of liquid surface I of the ink and second dispensing communicating hole 454, of ink reservoir chamber 111 is decompressed, so it is possible to substa escape of the ink inside
  • Figure 18 is a diagram that shows the vicinity of detection part 1 a diagram that shows the outline of the vicinity of detection part 140, cross-sectional view of detection part 140 through line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in Figure 18(c) is a cross-sectional diagram of the vicinity of detection part XVIIIC-XVIIIC in Figure 18(a)
  • detection part 140 projects outward fro (right side in Figure 18(a))
  • Detection part 140 is equipped with enclosur encloses the end of sensor arm 470 (see Figure 19) (shielding arm part 473 it with a pair of wall surfaces and forms a passage through which senso displaced Enclosure part 141 is formed into a roughly box-shaped pass surface, which is formed by bottom wall 141a inside enclosure part 141 (lo 18(a)), a pair of side surfaces, which are formed by both side walls 141b th both sides from bottom wall 141a, an inner side surface, which is formed 141c that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side ceiling surface, which is formed by ceiling wall 14 Id that connects to the side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c and is positione wall 141a
  • Detection part 140 is also equipped with arm supporting p provided such that it projects upward from the bottom surface formed by and supports sensor arm 470 from below, and vertical
  • He inside detection part 140 is reduced, and when liquid surface I of the ink this reduction of ink and liquid surface I of the ink falls below detection inside detection part 140 is depleted, but because first gap t3 between se enclosure 141 is minute, ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the the ink, and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due to this sensor arm 470 and enclosure part 141
  • the ink that remains ins 141 is drawn between arm supporting part 142 and enclosure part 141, s substantially prevent ink from remaining between sensor arm 470 and encl to suppress the inhibition of the behavior of sensor arm 470 Sensor a behaves normally, so the amount of remaining in
  • bottom wall 141a on the lower part of e slopes downward in the direction of ink reservoi the bottom surface formed by bottom wall 141a inside enclosure 141 also Therefore, ink that is drawn between enclosure part 141 and arm supporti downward in the direction of ink reservoir chamber 111 (or supply path f)
  • the junct bottom wall 141a of enclosure 141 and arm supporting part 142 is formed cross-sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), so the capillary force of of enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 becomes strong, and this is conducive to guiding ink to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (or su part 420)
  • the junction part of enclosure part 141 and arm s forms a fluid guiding path (guide) for guiding the ink
  • vertical wall 143 that connects to arm sup formed on sloping surface 143 a, which slopes downward in the directio forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Sloping surface 143a const the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer circumference welded part 4 illustrated in the cross-sectional view in Figure 18(c), the junction part of and the inside wall of frame part 110 is formed angularly from a cross-sec (roughly a right angle), and it is formed such that its thickness is roughly eq arm supporting part 141 Therefore, vertical wall 143 slopes downward i arm supporting part 142. As a result, there is no resistance against the guidi path forming part 420, and ink can therefore by efficiently guided
  • sensor arm 470 In the case in which sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, sensor arm 470 the ceiling surface formed by ceiling wall 141b, which opposes bottom wall part 140, and the rotation of sensor arm 470 is thus restricted It is the prevent sensor arm 470 from jumping out of enclosure part 140, and the arm 470 becomes accurate, so it is possible to accurately detect the amount
  • sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to Figure 19 Fig that shows sensor arm 470.
  • Figure 19(a) is a diagram that shows the front 470
  • Figure 19(b) is a diagram that shows sensor arm 470 from the pe XiXb in Figure 19(a)
  • Sensor arm 470 is a member for detecting the amoun inside ink reservoir chamber 111
  • Sensor arm 470 is manufactured by inject a resin material (polypropylene, for example), and it has light-blocking pr is formed to be opaque
  • Sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates according to the am ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and a portion is detected by remai sensor 57 (see Figure 5), which detects the amount of remaining ink reservoir chamber 111
  • Sensor arm 470 is primarily equipped with balance formed from a material with a lower specific gravity than that of the ink, att which is attached to frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 4 from this attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogon
  • attachment part 472 Thi which slopes upward from this vertical arm part 473 a, and shielding arm p used as a light-blocking part that blocks the range of possible detection detection sensor 57
  • arm part 473 is formed such that it is su than balance part 471 and attachment part 472 This is because, when arm with a thick profile, the scale of detection part 140 is increased, and as a r 14 becomes large and the resistance when sensor arm 470 rotates increases, makes it impossible to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink.
  • arm part 473 is formed with a thm prevent increases in the scale of ink cartridge 14 and to detect the ac remaining ink Ribs 473d are formed on vertical arm part 473a and sloping a the strength is maintained by these ribs
  • Roughly semispherical arm protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2 are for arm part 473c in two locations on the top and bottom of the part housed in 140 (upper side end and lower side end in Figure 19(a)), and these arm protr and 473 e2 reduce the likelihood of shielding arm part 473 c adhering to detection part 140 due to the surface tension of the ink and becoming unable words, because arm protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2 are formed into sem the only part that makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2, so the effects of the surface tension of the
  • Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravity that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step with decreases remaining ink, balance part 471 moves in the direction of the bottom part
  • the inside of the balance part was ho make the balance part float on liquid surface I of the ink, but with this working (or molding) of the balance part becomes difficult
  • the materials of sensor arm 470 consist of materials with spe are less than that of the ink, so a working process is not required, and it i manufacture complex dies, so the manufacturing cost of sensor arm 470 can
  • Figure 20(a) shows the side surface of ink reservoir element 100
  • Figure 20(b) is a dia partial front view of ink reservoir element 100
  • Figure 20(c) is a cr through line XXc-XXc in Figure 20(a)
  • ink supply part 120, ambient and detection part 140 are provided on one of the side surfaces of frame surface, the side surface in the front direction of installation when in installed)
  • the position illustrated in Figures 20(a) position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed inside accommodating chamb 13 see Figure 1 Therefore, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installe 13, ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, and ink supply part 12 aligned from top (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom of Figure 20(a)) I elements are aligned in the height direction (Y-direction) of ink cartridge 14
  • width t5 of detection part 140 is form shorter than diameter t6 of the opening of ink supply part 120 (opening 6 600 described below (see Figure 34))
  • 140 is formed such that it is concave in the direction of frame part 1 withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111) with respect to ink su detection part 140 (both left and right sides in Figure 20(a)), so both side su part 140 (surfaces on the left and right sides in Figure 20(a), front and ba Figure 20(b)) form detection surfaces 140a and 140b
  • F detection surfaces 140a and 140b are parallel to the height direction ( cartridge 14 when in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in other words, the surfaces are vertical When ink adheres to the front detection surfaces 140a and 140b, it is sometimes impossible to detect the a remaining ink
  • detection part 140 susceptible to the effects of gravity and likely to drop, but because det withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect to ink su ink that drops does not head towards detection part 140, so it does not adher 140 Because detection surfaces 140a and 140b are vertical when in the pos cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13, the ink is most susceptible to the when ink cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13 while the ink is ad surfaces 140a and 140b, so it drops quickly It is therefore possible to subs transfer of ink to light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a detection sensor 57 Furthermore, the ink that drops does not adhere to the supply part 120
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily brok elements
  • the four parts are frame part 110, ink supply mechanism 500, wh supply part 120, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which constitutes ambi 130, and ink dispensing plug 520, which is pressed into dispensing cylind dispensing part 150 (see Figure 17)
  • Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of is inserted, are formed as a unit on frame part 110
  • protruding pa protruding part 116b is not illustrated in the figure
  • protruding part 116b is not illustrated in the figure
  • protruding part 116b which protrude in t outer circumference of ink supply element 116 in order to fasten ink suppl are symmetrically arranged on ink supply element 116 centered on the a supply element 115 (arranged on the front and back sides in directions pe page in Figure 21)
  • protruding parts 117a and 117b protrudin illustrated in the figure
  • FIG. 22 is of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 exploded view of ink supply mechanism 500
  • Figure 22(b) is an ambient air intake mechanism 510
  • ink supply mechanism 500 is equipped wi which is installed on ink supply element 116, supply joint 610, which is of arrow Ol in Figure 22(a), hereafter called the "axial direction Ol of ink s 500", regarding this direction, as is clear from Figure 14, ink supply mecha parallel to the X-direction when ink cartridge 14 is loaded)
  • second supply s is housed inside this supply slider 640 and is formed with the same material shape as those of first supply spring 630, valve seat 660, which makes second supply slider 650 and receives check valve 670, and cover 680, w valve 670 between the valve and this valve seat 660
  • Supply valve 620, first supply slider 640, and second supply spring 650 constitute supply valve me actually operates
  • ambient air intake mechanism 510 is equip air cap 700
  • supply cap 600 is formed with a two-step view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in the upper side part in Figure 23 (a) is supply securing part 601, which is fas circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and is formed into a ro shape, while the lower side part in Figure 23(b) is ink storage part 602, storage space for preventing ink from dripping to the outside of ink cartridge
  • Engagement holes 603a and 603b are formed on supply securing part 601
  • a pair of supply cap cutout parts 604a and 23 (c) for supply cap cutout part 604b), which are formed in a straight li orthogonal to the straight line that connects engagement holes 603a an moved approximately 90° with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply me are cut out facing the direction of ink storage part 602 from the top surface o part 601 (upper end surface in Figure 23 (b)), are formed on supply securing
  • sloping wall 606b slopes downward, so the insertion ope is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross-sectional view in that it decreases in diameter towards insertion hole 605 with a maximum d opening 600a, which forms the final exit of the ink
  • the inn surface on the side of axial center Ol of sloping wall 606b becomes the i which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inserted
  • the space of range t7 illustrate and 23 (c) (in other words, the space formed by sloping wall 606b, lower wa circumferential wall 606e) forms ink storing part 607, in which in (accumulated)
  • the axial center of supply joint 610 is po center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, and joint contact part 613, joint in part 612, and joint outer circumference part are sequentially formed t circumferential direction from this axial center Ol
  • joint contact part 613 projects from top joint inner circumference part 612 (surface on the side that makes contact 620) Joint contact part 613 is formed such that it narrows toward tip 613a ( Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes contact with the bottom surface of and blocks the flow path of the ink
  • joint protruding part 614 whic the inner circumferential surface toward axial center 01, opening 612c, insertion opening of needle 49 (see Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 61 circumference part 612 (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped inserti which is formed between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614, are surface 612b of joint inner circumference part 612 to tip 613a of joint cont the upper side to the lower side in Figure 24(d)), is formed on supply joint 6 path 615 consists of opening 612c, which is formed on bottom surface 61 path 615a, which is demarcated by stepped insertion passage 612d connecte protruding part flow path 615
  • Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smallest diamete 615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape
  • the inside protruding part flow path 615b is formed such that it is slightly smaller tha countersunk shape by its inner circumferential surface 613b and stepped sur 613a of joint contact part 613 is positioned in the periphery of this cutout par
  • Needle 49 which is inserted from opening 612c, is guided to the upper p flow path 615a that is formed in a tapered shape and is inserted into protrudi 615b At this time, because the inside diameter of protruding part flow pat smaller than the diameter of needle 49, needle 49 elastically adheres to inn surface 614a of joint protruding part 614 that forms protruding part flow pressed inside such that it spreads protruding part flow path 615b.
  • valve constraimng parts 625 which project in the op valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of supply slider 640, is c outer circumferential wall 622
  • Each of the valve constraining parts 625 valve hook part 626, which projects towards axial center Ol from its tip (tip portion in Figure 25(a)) and engages with supply slider 640
  • valve protruding parts 622a which protrude in semicircu outer circumferential direction and are formed from the top to the botto circumferential wall 622, are formed on valve outer circumferential wal spacing along valve outer circumferential wall 622.
  • valve protrudi provided in order to smoothly perform the operations of supply valve 620 w 620 is inserted into ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21)
  • the inner circumferential surface of ink supply eleme outer circumferential surface 622 sometimes make contact, so the contact supply element 116 becomes large, and the resistance at the time of operat large Therefore, because valve protruding parts 622a formed in semicir provided, only valve protruding parts 622a make contact with the inne surface of ink supply element 116, and the operations of supply valve 620 direction of valve bottom wall 621 (direction perpendicular to the page in formed on valve bottom wall 621 in positions corresponding to valve guid constraining part 625 in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply (direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 25 (c))
  • Valve bottom wall 62 from its bottom surface and is equipped with valve bearing part 628, which receives spring top part 632 of first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26)
  • Valv is
  • valve bearing part 628 is provided in order to secure the i the part is acceptable as long as first supply spring 630 does not make c bottom wall 621, so it is formed to the minimum required height, and this p in the scale of the size in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mech
  • Valve inner circumferential wall 629 which is formed in a roughly circul the outer circumferential surface of spring top part 632 of first supply spring on the outside of valve bearing part 62$ and on the inside of ink flow pat inner circumferential wall 629 is provided in order to restrict the moveme spring 630 in a direction that is orthogonal to axial center 01, and first sup accurately bent in the direction of axial center Ol by restricting the movem spring 630 in a direction that is orthogonal to axial center Ol
  • Figure 26 is a diagram that shows first supply sp ⁇ ng 630 Figure 26(a) ring-shaped spring top part 632, which is formed with a diameter that is diameter of this spring bottom part 631 and forms the top part of the upp supply spring 630 (end of the side with the smaller diameter), and spring which is connected between this spring top part 632 and spring bottom pa and deforms when a load is applied in the direction of axial center mechanism 500 (the movement direction of supply valve 620 that is press (see Figure 2); also the biased direction
  • ink flow path 634 which communicate spring top part 632 (right end surface in Figure 26(d)) to the bottom surface part 631 (left end surface in Figure 26(d)), is formed on first supply spring 6 path 634 consists of top part flow path 634a, which is demarcated by the inn surface of spring top part 632, plastic part flow path 634b, which is demarc circumferential surface of spring plastic part 633, and bottom part flow pat demarcated by the inner circumferential surface of spnng bottom part 631 Figure 26(d), the area of the opening of this ink flow path 634 gradually incr of spnng top part 632 towards the bottom surface of spring bottom part 6 illustrated in Figures 26(b) and 26(c), top part flow path 634a of spring top p in a circular shape from the perspective of the direction perpendicular to spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed into a roughly reversed bowl sh on the side moving away from axial center 01, spring plastic part 633 ca device
  • spring plastic part 633 is formed into a bowl shape (or roughly conical shape) that curves (or slopes) at a prescr direction of axial center Ol As a result, the strength with respect to loading i axial center Ol become weak in comparison to spnng bottom part 631 and s Furthermore, spring plastic part 633 is formed such that it has a thinner p bottom part 631 and spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength.
  • a first supply spnng 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically defo
  • Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that of first s and the composition of second supply spnng 650 consists of spring botto
  • Figure 27 is a diagram that shows supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(a) is a di a side view of supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(b) is a diagram that shows a si slider 640 from the perspective of arrow XXVIIb in Figure 27(a)
  • Figure 2 that shows a plan view of supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(d) is a diagram tha view of supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(e) is a cross-sectional view of through line XXVIIe-XXVIIe in Figure 27(c)
  • Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a higher degree first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) and second supply spring 650, a equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 641, which forms the o supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting walls 642a and 642b, which slider outer circumferential wall 641 in the direction of axial center O mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose insertion parts 643, which extend circumferential wall 641 to the upper tip of slider projecting wall 642a ( Figure 27(a)) and are loosely inserted into valve guide grooves 623 of supp Figure 25), slider platform part 644, either side on which first and second s and 650 are arranged, which is formed on the inside of slider outer circum and makes contact with spring bottom parts 631 and 651 of first and secon 650, and slider through-hole 645, which is formed in the center position part 644 and connects the top and bottom of slider platform part 644 As is 27(c), slider projecting walls 642a and 642b are positioned [symmetricall sandwich
  • slider outer circumferential wall 641 is forme roughly equivalent to the outside diameter sp ⁇ ng lower parts 631 and 651 o supply springs 630 and 650, and slider projecting walls 642a and 642b are protruding part 642), so when they are loosely inserted into valve guide Figure 25), they are moved smoothly in the direction of axial center Ol of and misalignment in the direction orthogonal to the direction of axial prevented.
  • Figure 28 is a diagram that shows valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(a) is a dia side view of valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(b) is a diagram that shows a plan 660
  • Figure 28(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of valve seat 660, a a cross-sectional view of valve seat 660 through line XXVIIId-XXVIIId in F
  • valve seat 660 is equipped with valve sea which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and makes contact w 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat bearing parts 662, which top surface of this valve seat bottom part 661 (upper side in Figure 28(a)) bearing part 662 is equipped with valve seat sloping surface 662a, which sl it approaches the center of valve seat 660, and check valve 670, which below, is received by this valve seat sloping surface 662a
  • valve seat bearing parts 662 are forme spacing in the circumferential direction of valve seat 660
  • First valve seat th which pass through the front and back of valve seat 660, are formed on thre seat bearing parts
  • first valve seat through-holes 662b are formed o than valve seat sloping surface 662a of valve seat bearing part 662 (hori valve seat bearing part 662) Therefore, because first valve seat throug formed on a portion that differs from the portion that receives check valve of the ink flow path can be prevented
  • second valve seat through-holes 663 which pass through part 661, are formed between valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve seat valve seat through-holes 663 to one another in a roughly linear manner on t of valve seat bottom part 661 Therefore, three valve seat communicating gr intersect at axial center 01, are formed Moreover, a pair of valve projecting project from this bottom surface, is formed on the bottom surface of valve 661
  • Spring top part 652 of second supply spring is housed in each of projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumferential top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of second supply direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
  • FIG. 28(d) a gap is formed between valve seat slopin valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat through-holes 663 in the center Ol
  • second valve seat through-holes 663 are positioned to t virtual circumference of valve seat projecting part 664 (virtual line R in Fig flow path of the ink is secured by valve seat communicating grooves communicating grooves 664 connect all of the second valve seat through-hol there are second valve seat through-holes 663 that are enclosed by valve se 665, the ink flow path can be reliably secured.
  • Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670
  • Figure 29(a) is a diag side view of check valve 670
  • Figure 29(b) is a diagram that shows a plan vi
  • Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of check valve 670, is a cross-sectional view of check valve 670 through line XXIXd-XXIXd in
  • Check valve 670 is roughly formed into an umbrella shape from a side (perspective in the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 29(a)), 680 and check valve 670
  • Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover through-hole 68 of cover 680, which will be described below
  • This shaft part 672 is position of cover 680 in the state in which it is attached to cover 680, and it has ball is formed into a roughly spherical shape.
  • This ball part 672a is formed with greater than that of second cover through-hole 684 of cover 680, and it pre 670 from falling off once it is attached to cover 680 As a result, it is possi loss of check valve 670 when manufacturing ink cartridge 14, and operationa
  • Figure 30 is a diagram that shows cover 680
  • Figure 30(a) is a diagram view of cover 680
  • Figure 30(b) is a diagram that shows a plan view of c
  • Figure 30(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of cover 680
  • Cover 680 is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape in which the bo
  • Cover 680 is equipped circumferential wall 681, which forms the outer periphery, and cover top forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Figure 30(a)), and it is for bottom surface side is opened
  • Valve seat 660 is fitted into the opemng of t of cover 680 (lower side in Figure 30(a)), and check valve 670 is housed b
  • the space that houses check valve 670 is 680 and valve seat 660 - inserted, is formed in the center of cover top part 682 (position passing thr Ol of ink supply mechanism 500)
  • Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is second cover through-hole 684, and check valve 670 is thereby attached E which check valve 670 is inserted into second cover through-hole 684, the ink is formed on a portion of this inner circumferential surface
  • w 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cover top part 682, the through-hole is blocked, so the ink flow path of second cover through-hole center is simultaneously blocked
  • Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31 (a) shows a side view of ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31(b) is a diagram that sho ambient air cap 700 from the perspective of arrow XXXIb in Figure 31 (a)
  • Figure 31(d) is a dia bottom view of ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31(e) is a cross-sectional vi cap 700 through line XXXIe-XXXIe in Figure 31(c)
  • ambient air cap 700 is equipped with ro ambient air securing part 701, which forms the side wall of this ambient a fastened to ambient air intake element 117 (see Figure 21), and ambient air 702, which forms the bottom wall of ambient air cap 700
  • Engagement hol see Figure 31(b) for engagement hole 703b
  • ambient air cap cutout parts 704a and 704 cutout part 704b is not illustrated in the figure), which are formed in ° air cap bottom wall 702
  • Ambient air joint 710 is housed s contact with the inside surface of ambient air cap bottom wall 70 circumferential surface of ambient air securing part 701.
  • FIG 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710
  • Figure 32(a) shows a side view of ambient air joint 710
  • Figure 32(b) is a diagram that s of ambient air joint 710
  • Figure 32(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom vi joint 710
  • Figure 32(d) is a cross-sectional view of ambient air joint XXXIId-XXXIId in Figure 32(b)
  • ambient air joint 710 is formed in four view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in F part illustrated in the second step from the bottom (lower side in Figure 32 circumference
  • Figure 33 is a diagram that shows ambient air valve 720
  • Figure 33 (a) shows a side view of ambient air valve 720
  • Figure 33(b) is a diagr bottom view of ambient air valve 720
  • Ambient air valve 720 has a confi valve open part 721a, which projects from the bottom surface of valve bott opens the ambient air intake path by making contact with the side of multi (see Figure 1), is added to supply valve 620 Therefore, detailed description wall 721, valve outer circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part 7 groove 723, valve projecting wall 724, valve constraimng part 725, valv ambient air intake path 727 (part corresponding to ink flow path 627), valve and valve inner circumferential wall 729 will be omitted here.
  • FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view that which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 are supply element 116 and ambient air intake element 117.
  • ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted int inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116, and a mechanism 510 is inserted into and attached to inner circumferential surfac air intake element 117
  • ink supply mechanism 500 which is attached to ink supply ele described.
  • valve seat 660 On inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 11 680, and valve seat 660 is arranged such that it houses this check valve 670
  • Second supply spring 650 is arranged on the bottom surface side of this v side in Figure 34
  • supply slider 640 is arranged such that it houses t spring 650
  • First supply spring 630 is housed by supply slider 640 on the second supply spring 650
  • first supply spring 630 is arranged between and supply valve 620
  • supply joint 610 is arranged such that it m the bottom surface of supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to supply element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of thi Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 116a and 11 element 116, so the position on the outside of ink supply mechanism 5 Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply determined by supply cap 600 and stepped surface 801a of inner circumfer of ink supply
  • inner circumferential surface 800 of ink suppl formed such that it is slightly larger than the outside diameter of supply va configured such that the operation of supply valve 620 in the direction of ax be performed smoothly inside ink supply element 116
  • a protruding parts 622a are formed on the outer circumferential surface of s and it is configured such that the contact surface with inner circumferenti small Therefore, even if supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal directio axial center Ol and makes contact with inner circumferential surface 800, prevent the state in which supply valve 620 cannot be operated
  • an i passes through the inside of ink supply mechanism 500 and an ink flo through the outside of supply valve 620 are formed
  • ambient air intake mechanism 510 which is attached to ambient 117, will be described On inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air i protruding part 811, which protrudes in the direction of ambient air intak (left direction in Figure 34), is formed on the end surface of ambient a forming part 430 on the side of first ambient air communicating chamber Th 811 is configured as a pair of plate-shaped member, and it makes contact wit of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750 As a result, an ambi is formed between protruding part 811 and spring top part 752 of second a 750 Moreover, the position of ambient air intake mechanism 510 on the sid air communicating hole 434 is determined as a result of second ambie making contact with protruding part 811
  • ambient air slider 740 is arr air intake mechanism 510 such that it houses second ambient air spring 750, air spnng 730 is housed by ambient air slider 740 on the opposite side of se spring 750, while first ambient air spnng 730 is arranged between ambient ambient air valve 720 Moreover, ambient air joint 710 is arranged such that with the bottom surface of ambient air valve 720, and ambient air cap 700 outside of ambient air intake element 17 such that it makes contact with the the outer circumferential side from joint skirt part 714 of this ambient air jo air cap 700 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 117a and 117b of element 117, so the position on the outside of ambient air intake m determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center 02 of a mechanism 510 is determined by ambient air cap 700 and protruding p film 160 is welded
  • Figure 36 is a diagram that explains the welding pro Figure 36(a) is a diagram that explains the welding surface of frame part 11 160 is
  • Figure 37(a) is a diagram attachment process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air i 510 are attached to frame part 110
  • Figure 37(b) is a diagram that explains t process
  • Figure 37(c) is a diagram that explains the ink dispensing proce diagram that explains the installation process of case 200
  • Figure 38(a) i explains the process in which case 200 sandwiches frame part 110
  • Figure 39(a) is a diagram that explains the process in which protector 300
  • Figure 39(b) is a diagram that explains the process in which ink cartridge 1 packaging bag 930
  • Frame part 110 and sensor arm 470 are ea injection molding in a preliminary process (molding process). In other respectively molded in a first molding process (preparatory process) in whi is injection-molded and in a second molding process (preparatory process) arm 470 is injection-molded
  • attachment shaft 472a which is provided on attach sensor arm 470 is attached to arm sandwiching part 425, which is provided supply path forming part 420 of frame part 110 (sensor arm 470 att preparatory process)
  • Arm sandwiching part 425 opens on the opposite side 473 c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141 d of enclosure part 141 of dete other words, once the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, sensor ar easily detached, so it is possible to prevent the manufacturing process of ink becoming complicated and to prevent sensor arm 470 from detaching from when the ink cartridge is transported As a result, when ink cartridge 1 multifunction device 1, the empty ink state can be reliably detected, so the product can be improved
  • a supporting part that forms the axis of rotational o arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (attachment shaft 472a) of s supported on arm sandwiching part 425 of frame part 110, but a configur attachment shaft is provided on the side of frame part 110 and a sandwichin on the side of sensor arm 470 may also be used, and a configuration in whic and frame part 110 are attached using a hinge junction would also be acc words, as long as sensor arm 470 is attached such that it can rotate with res 110, its attachment structure may take any form
  • ink dispensing pressed inside dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing part 150 (in 520 pressing process, preparatory process)
  • Ink dispensing plug 520 is outside end surface 520a of ink dispensing plug 520 is in roughly the s outside surface of frame part 110, and it is not pressed to a position such that with bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451.
  • first dispensing cornmunicating hole 452 of dispensing passage forming part the side surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, and when ink dispensing pl to the back of dispensing cylinder part 451, first dispensing communicating block, making it impossible to dispense ink Moreover, ink dispensing p opening 112b.
  • film 160 is cut such that it is larger than t of frame part 110 and it covers frame part 110.
  • film 160 is opening 112a and second opening 112b without wrinkles by aspirating aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) from the side of frame part 110.
  • surface 900 of an ultrasonic welding device (not illustrated in the figure) is 160 such that it covers the outer circumference parts of first and second o 112b (outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of f 160 is welded to frame part 110.
  • film 160 is welded to each weld painted black in Figure 37(a) (outer circumference welded parts 400a an circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b) are welded.
  • ultrasound welded su ultrasonic welding device is configured such that it covers all of the w circumference welded parts and inner circumference welded parts), so it is increases in the manufacturing cost of the welding process of film 160
  • film 160 is made of a "double-layered film comprising a polyethylene film (called "nylon polyethylene” hereafter), and the side th with frame part 110 is the polyethylene film layer This nylon polyethylene liquids, but it is relatively gas permeable, so a small amount of gas circu between ink reservoir chamber 111, which is roughly sealed by film 160, a 930 (see Figure 39(b)), which will be described below
  • gas tha Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is
  • Nylon films are superior to polyethylene films from t strength, but their melting point is high, so they are deficient from the persp operationality Therefore, when film 160 is formed with a double-layer s nylon and polyethylene, the strength is secured, and by using the polyeth layer that is welded to frame part 110, welding can be performed at a low he so welding operationality is secured. Furthermore, the nylon layer does welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of the film in welded parts, and the strength of the film in the vicinity of the welded maintained.
  • ink supply part 120 is construed
  • ink dispensing needle 920 when the decompression inside frame pa after the decompression process, ink dispensing needle 920 is inserted in plug 520, and ink is dispensed into frame part 110 (ink reservoir chamber 11 process).
  • the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is depressurized, so t dispensed into ink reservoir chamber 111, and when a prescribed amount dispensed, dispensing needle 920 is removed and the ink dispensing proc
  • the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after ink is dispensed is air pressure)
  • "a prescribed amount of ink” refers to the quantity surface I of the ink drops below second ambient air communicating ho ambient air communicating hole 436 of ambient air communicating passage as illustrated in Figure 37(c) Therefore, when ink is dispensed, the penet ambient air connection passage 433 can be avoided.
  • Ink is dispensed in the state in which the inside of ink reservoir decompressed by pressure reducing device 910, so even after the disp complete, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is in the decom pressure pi) Therefore, there are cases in which a subsequent decompressi that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be desc ⁇ bed
  • the subseque process is performed using ink dispensing needle 920, which was inserted i plug 520
  • a supply device that supplies ink (not illustrated in pressure reducing device that reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambien part 110 (not illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing nee the ink is completely dispensed, the flow path is switched and decompressio reducing device is begun
  • the air pressure p3 (third pressure) inside ink r 111 after subsequent decompression is performed is lower than the air press reservoir chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed Therefore, the quantity reservoir chamber 111 further decreases as a result
  • the o dispensing communicating hole 454 is positioned above liquid surface I o Figure 17(a)), so even if subsequent decompression is performed with a device, the ink is never aspirated to the outside through the dispensing pat amount of ink that is dispensed never changes due to subsequent decom possible to reliably dispense a prescribed amount of ink
  • the dispensing or deco to prevent the occurrence of defective products
  • Case 200 first and second case 220 is molded by injection-molding, and it is manufactured in advanc process
  • rod members 215a to member 210 are inserted into three through-holes 460a to 460c (se through-holes 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumfere part 100, and ink reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member ink supply part 120 (supply cap 600) and ambient air intake part 130 (ambie respectively engaged with case cutout parts 211 and 212, and the outer wall 120 (outer circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of element 130 (outer circumferential surface of ambient air cap 700) make co grooves 211a and 212a Second case member 220 is then attached such tha parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) of second case member 22 members 215a to 215c of first case member 210.
  • ink supply pa 600) and ambient air intake part 130 are respectively e cutout parts 221 and 222 of second case member 220, and the outer wall 120 (outer circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of element 130 (outer circumference of ambient air cap 700) make contact wit 221a and 222a.
  • first and second case members 210 and 220 another (case 200 welding process).
  • any welding range or welding method may be use
  • first and second case members 210 and 220 are as ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first and second case 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultrasonic welding is abso Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations in which the welded parts of film 160 are damaged or film 160 peels as a result of vibration accompanyi case 200 Moreover, when the welded parts of first and second case member partially welded, the generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding is damage of each part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced. As illustrated in Figure 38(b), case projecting parts 214a and 224a (ca).
  • the air pressure inside packaging bag 930 is made lower tha inside ink reservoir chamber 111 as a result of the packaging space decom film 160 of ink cartridge 14 can be plastically deformed on the side of p (side of case 200) If the air pressure inside packaging bag 930 is higher tha inside ink reservoir chamber 111, film 160 sometimes hardens and loses damaged in the state in which the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is de ink cartridge 14 is left without being used for a long period of time.
  • the shape of ink reservoir chamber 111 do not change, and becomes nonuniform, so ink cannot be accurately supplied Moreover, damaged, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows to the outside of
  • the inside of packaging bag 930 is decompre air pressure is lower than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111, s be deformed on the side of packaging bag 930 (revertible) Therefore, even it is not used for long periods of time, it is possible to reduce situations in permeable, so the air pressure of the space inside ink reservoir chambe pressure of the space inside packaging bag 930 and outside ink reservoir ch to transition to the equilibrium state, and the gas therefore moves to the o ink reservoir chamber 111. Accordingly, the deaeration of the ink store chamber 111 is promoted, and it becomes more difficult for air bubbles t printing quality can be favorably maintained
  • ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging bag 930 in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 200, so it never ma with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink supply part 120) as packaging bag 9 decompression Valve open part 721a projects to the outside of ambient air i if packaging bag 930 makes direct contact with valve open part 721a, val operates and the ambient air intake path is sometimes opened. If the ambien opened, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out. Moreover, ambi 130 and ink supply part 120 are sometimes damaged in step with th packaging bag 930. However, in this embodiment, protector 300 is attache the damage of ambient air intake part 130 and ink supply part 120 can be p opening of the ambient air intake path can be prevented
  • ink cartridge 14 is manufactured in a process in welded over ink reservoir element 100 after ink is dispensed inside ink reser of frame part 110
  • ink was dispense case after the ink reservoir element was covered with the case (after the as cartridge is completely finished)
  • case 200 is covered after ink is dispensed chamber 111 of ink reservoir element 100, so common parts can be used described with reference to Figure 40.
  • Figure 40 is a diagram that shows the ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction device 1.
  • This light emitting part 57a a part 57b are respectively inserted into through-holes formed by case cutout and detection part 140, and are attached such that they project from Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is configured such that it does not out signal to a control unit provided on multifunction device 1 when light r receives light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a and outputs (or d signal to the control device when light that is emitted from light emitting p and is not received by light receiving part 57b
  • ink cartridge 14 in the state in whic is the one side surface of case 200 positioned in the front in installation dir cartridge 14 is in the regular installation position Therefore, because ink detection part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are provided such that (located close to each other) on a single end surface, remaining ink det needle 49, and passage 54, which are required on the side of multifunction consolidated (located close to each other) onto a single surface (back s supply part 120 were provided on the bottom surface of in
  • the ink When the amount of remaimng ink is detected by irradiating a portion o (corresponding to detection part 140 in this embodiment) using (corresponding to remaining ink detection sensor 57 in this embodiment) which the presence of ink is detected directly (method for detecting the am ink based on whether or not ink is present in the light path of the photodet the ink could not be fully used with a configuration in which the ink (corresponding to ink supply part 120 in this embodiment) and the irrad irradiated by photodetector (detection part 140) are both provided on a sing photodetector, the amount of ink that is left over becomes large.
  • i sensor arm 470 is used, so even if the irradiated part is provided in a relativ the absence of ink can be detected in step with the timing in which the remaining ink becomes low, and the ink supply opening is provided in a low is little leftover ink (The description is given out of place, but a remain method using sensor arm 470 will be described in detail below.)
  • ink cartridge 14 is installed in a proce protruding parts 214a and 224a (first case welded parts 216 and 226) of cas to slide on door main body 60, and the back surface of ink cartridge installation direction F until most of ink cartridge 14 is inserted into refill u as described above, sloping surfaces 214a2 and 224a2 are formed on cas 214a and 224a, so ink cartridge 14 can be smoothly inserted due to these 214a2 and 224a2
  • a portion of the back surfac 14 is push part 200a, and this is a part that is pushed such that it makes con retaining member 61.
  • the needle 49 is in supply part 120 and ink supply is enabled, the valve opening part 721a o intake part 130 contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, enabling intake o the remaining ink detection sensor 57 is inserted through the through-hole fo cutout parts 213 and 223 and the detection part 140, enabling detection quantity of ink The details of this will be described later.
  • the light emitting part 57a and the light r of the remaimng ink detection sensor 57 become positioned inside the c becomes possible to prevent damage to the remaining ink detection sens preventing misdetection due to dirt, dust or the like adhering to the light emi retaining member 61 is configured to have a greater elastic force than generated by the spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able t ink cartridge 14 once it has been installed
  • the push part 200a by the pushing retaimng member 61 is located substantially in the middle supply part 120 and the ambient air intake part 130, allowing a substantiall force to be applied to the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air intake because the ink cartridge 14 is retained at three points in the installation di cartridge 14 - one point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing retai and two
  • the pushing retaining member 61 pushes below the (midpoint p) in the height direction of the ink cartridge 14, a large force operate the door member 60, making it possible to stably retain the ink prescribed position
  • the pivot of rotation of the door member 60 is located of the case 40, and the user performs the operation of opemng and closing by manipulating the edge part of the door member 60.
  • the point of ac pushing retaining member 61 pushes the ink cartridge 14 will be at a distan of rotation of the door member 60, thus requiring a large force for the user part 120, a large force is not required to operate the door member, making it install the ink cartridge at the presc ⁇ bed location
  • Figure 41 is a drawing illustrating the state with 14 having been installed in the multifunction device 1. Since Figure 41 i purpose of explaining the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and mechanism 510, the case 200, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction devi have been omitted from the drawing.
  • the detection part 140 consists transparent resin material, allowing the light emitted from the light emittin remaining ink detection sensor 57 to pass through the detection part 140 a the light receiving part 57b Since the shielding arm part 473c of the s arranged in the enclosure part 141 of the detection part 140, as described abo ink quantity can be detected by the operation of
  • the ink supply mechanism 500 when the ink cartridge 14 multifunction device 1 , the needle 49 is inserted through the space surround wall 606d of the supply cap 600, the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 60 path 615 of the supply joint 600 in that order, and the tip of the needle 49 bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620, depressing the supply valve 620 supply valve 620 moves away from the joint contact part 613 of the supply j supply valve 620 (and supply slider 640), as described above, has a slig flexible part 633
  • there is no flexing in the spring flexib second supply spring 650 arranged on the opposite side of the supply slider supply spring 630 This serves to determine the flexing order of the first a springs 630 and 650.
  • the first supply spring 630 with the flex part 633 flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that whe inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second supply
  • the mside diameter of the valve outer circumferential wall valve 620 and the outside diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall slider 640 are formed to be substantially equal Thus, it becomes possib occurrence of misalignment in the direction of displacement when the s operates in the direction of axis Ol of the ink supply mechanism 500.
  • the first members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider pedestal part 644 of the s needle 49 and moves in the direction of valve seat 660 (nghtward accompanying this movement, the first supply spring 630 is flexibly de become compressed, whereupon the supply slider 640 moves in the direct 660 (the direction opposite to the impelling direction of the first supply sprin supply spring 650), and the second supply spring undergoes flexible deform the state illustrated in Figure 41.
  • the ink flow path K is a flow path fo ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14), second supply communicatin supply communicating hole 421, first cover through-hole 683 (and second c 684) of cover 680, first valve seat through-hole 662b and second valve seat of valve seat 660, valve seat communicating groove 664 of valve seat 660, i of second supply sp ⁇ ng 650, slider through-hole 645 of supply slider 640, i of first supply spring member 630, first spring member 930 and valve bearin a flow path which leads successively through the ink flow path 627 of s cutout 49a of needle 49 and the inside of needle 49
  • the space betwee circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 and the inner circumferent ink supply member 116 is also an ink flow path.
  • contact part 613 is displaced in a direction substantially orthogonal to insertion of the needle 49, the stroke for forming an ink flow path does not long Thus, it becomes possible to reduce contact of the needle 49 with reducing damage as well as reducing the size increase of the ink supply mech
  • the operation of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ambie depressed will be described.
  • the first ambient air spring 730 housed insid valve 720 (and the ambient air slider 740), as described above, has a slig flexible part 733, while there is no flexing in the spring flexible part 7 ambient air spring 750 Thus, the flexing order is determined for the first an air springs 730 and 750 as well.
  • the inside diameter of the valve outer circumferential ambient air valve 720 and the inside diameter of the slider outer circumfer the ambient air valve 720 are formed to be substantially equal.
  • t misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient air slider 7 direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 can be preven the inside diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the out the spring bottom parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air spr circumferential wall 722 of the ambient air valve 720, misalignment in displacement when the ambient air valve 720 operates in the direction o prevented Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis 02 o intake mechanism 510 is stabilized.
  • Figure 42 illustrates the state with rem Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty).
  • Figure 42 (a) illustrates the state with rem Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty).
  • Figure 42 (a) illustrates the state with rem Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty).
  • Figure 42 (a) illustrates the state with rem Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty).
  • the direction of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by the com buoyancies and the gravities acting on the nght side portion (on the side of part 473c) and the left side (on the side of the balance part 471).
  • the blocking arm part 473c emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink
  • the balance part 471 also emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink Whe 471 emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink
  • the buoyancy generated o 471 which causes the sensor arm 470 to rotate in the clockwise direction arrow Gl in Figure 43
  • the gravity generated on the balance part 471 sensor arm 470 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction (the direction Figure 43) balance each other out, so the overall combined force is balanced the liquid surface I of the ink drops further, the balance part 471 moves do the liquid surface I, so the sensor arm 470 rotates counterclockwise.
  • the out-of-ink lamp is illuminated or audio is used to inform device is out of ink It is also possible to use a counter provided in the contr the number of times ink has been discharged and to detect the quantity of additionally employing a software counter which hypothetically determines out of ink
  • the attachment position shaft 472a of the sensor arm 470 and of the arm sandwiching part 425 of th i e the position of the center (pivot) about which the sensor arm 470 rot below the detection part 140 and above the ink supply part 120, and is posi (to the left in Figure 42 (a) and Figure 42 (b)) of the supply path formin direction of installation of the ink cartridge 14
  • t 120, ambient air intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged toge surface of the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink su ambient air intake mechanism and remaimng ink detection mechanism) together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1, preventing the s unit 13 from becoming complicated, and also reducing its size.
  • Furthermor part 120 being a part which supplies ink by causing it to flow out to the mul detection part 140, the length of the space between the balance part 417 a part 472 will become greater and the sensor arm 470 will become larger, quantity of ink will decline accordingly
  • t of the balance part 471 will become extremely small, making detection of in
  • the position of the center of rotation of t (the "pivot" consisting of the attachment part 472) is arranged above the in and below the detection part 140 Consequently, as described above, ink- detected and reduction of the ink reservoir capacity due to increased size 470 is avoided.
  • the balance part 47 second supply communicating hole 423 and the vibration caused by operati part 471 will be transmitted to the ink, interfering with ink flow.
  • Figure 44 is a cross-sectional view illustratin the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunction device 1 in a wrong orie
  • the protruding parts 214a and 224a will collide with the tip of the protrusion 5 with the top and bottom reversed from the proper installation orientation, th 120 will be located above the ambient air intake part 130, resulting in an inc (or a second orientation) with respect to the proper installation orientation
  • the total projection distance t9 includin distance of the protrusion 55 from the back surface 56 of the case 40 a distance of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a from the case 200
  • i projection distance t8 of the needle 49 from the needle forming member difference between projection distance t8 and projection distance t9 prevents the tip of the valve opening part 721a projecting outward from the ambient a and the tip of the needle 49.
  • the needle 49 is a member for extracting the i cartridge 14 and supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrate cases where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately supp is not performed accurately).
  • the needle 49 t deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve opening part 72 upside-down from the proper installation orientation, the remaining ink de may collide with the outer wall of the case 200, which may damage t detection sensor 57
  • a difference is provided between proj and projection distance t9, it becomes possible to prevent damage to t detection sensor 57 due to collision with the outer wall of the case 200, ma accurately detect the remaimng quantity of ink
  • Figure 45 is a dr the method of removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction device 1
  • the lock release lever 63 of the door 41 is rotated f in Figure 45 (a)) (rotated in the direction of the arrow in Figure 45 (a))
  • the engagement between the door and the lock member fitting part 46 is disengaged, and as a result, the door forward
  • the latch parts 216 case 200 are pulled out by the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65, an ink cartridge 14 projects from inside the case 40 as a result (the state of Fig this state, the user can easily remove the ink cartridge 14
  • the ink supply includes a valve mechanism impelled by a first supply spring 630 and a sec 650, so when removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction devic from the state of Figure 46 (a) to the state of Figure 46 (b)), ink may adhere tip of the needle 49, or in the worst case, ink may flow out from the ink supp the valve 620 moves in the direction such that it contacts with the joint conta the impelling force of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spr needle 49 is removed from the supply joint
  • first protruding part consisting of the case projecting parts 214a and 224 outward (rightward in Figure 46 (b)) than the projecting tip of the ink supply the ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips down in the form of ink dro down from the ink supply part 120, the dripped ink can be made to adhere part 120 side surface of the case projecting parts 214a and 224a. Furthermo projecting parts 214a and 224a and the ink supply part 120 are positioned r each other, it is easy to make the ink dripping from the ink supply part 120 projectmg parts 214a and 224a.
  • Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the structure, which reduces th to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the Figure 47 (a) illustrates the state of installing or removing the ink cartrid refill unit 13 (multifunction device 1);
  • Figure 47 (b) is a drawing which illus where the detection part 140 of the ink cartridge 14 is formed, and Fi perspective view of ink cartridge 14.
  • the ink cartridge 14 of Figure 47 (a simplified fashion without showing the detailed structure, as this figure serv outer shape of the ink cartridge 14 and its positional relationship to the detect
  • the 140a and 140b of the detection part 140 will be arranged vertically (the u with reference to the direction of the symbol in Figure 47 (b)), so the in detection surfaces 140a and 140b will drip down to the ambient air intake p its own weight.
  • the ink supply part 120 lower part and the ambient air intake part 130 is located at the upper part ( Figure 47 (a)), so even if there is ink adhering to the detection part 140 duri removal of the ink cartridge 14, the ink will flow to the ink supply part 12 possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 14 discussed above, the edge part 40 of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b an 100a of the frame part 110 is formed substantially as a right angle, so in 200, so even if ink should spatter, adhesion of the spattered ink to the detect and 140b can be reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply outward from the case 200, in the installation orientation of ink cartridg Figure 47 (a)), the distance to the detection part 140
  • Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross-sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is a simplified cro of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 48 (b)
  • Fig color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side by side, and a large capacity b 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjacent thereto In other capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or the black ink cartridge 14kl is selective at an end position in the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left Figure 48 (a))
  • the case 40 illustrated in Figure 48 (a) accommodates a lar ink cartridge 14k2
  • case 2040 is configured to accommodate cartridges Regarding the arrangement of the four ink cartridges, three color are arranged side by side, and a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjace words, just as in case 40, the black ink cartridge 14kl is accommodated at the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left-right direction in Fig
  • case 40 Since case 40 allows both a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 cartridge 14kl to be installed, it is formed to accommodate the thickness of black ink cartridge 14k2 Thus, the lateral width tl4 (the width in the direc of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2, the left-right direction in Figure 48 longer than the lateral width tl5 (the width in the direction of alignment of 14c and 14kl, the left-right direction in Figure 48 (b))
  • the difference b width tl4 of case 40 and the lateral width tl5 of case 2040 corresponds between the height of the vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of the second illustrated in Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 22 case member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
  • case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14kl or a large c cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 2040 only allows install cartridge 14kl This implies providing users with two types of multifunc already discussed above, since users whose frequency of text printing is l cartridges 14c and 14k2.
  • the gaps tl6 between the needles 49 penetrati cartridges 14c are equal, while the gap tl7 between the needle 49 penetrat capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 and the needle 49 penetrating the a cartridge 14c is formed to have a longer distance than gap tl6
  • the differ tl6 and gap tl7 corresponds to the difference between the height of the v 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the hei wall parts 2210b to 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure
  • the black ink is a while the color inks consist of dye type inks
  • black ink is u text pnnting, and is thus made from a pigment type ink with low permeabi order to make the edges of the characters clear
  • color ink is used pri printing, so it is made from a dye type ink with high permeability into paper the granularity of dots less apparent and improve the appearance of the col there is little effect of color change when color inks are mixed together, whe with another color ink, the effect of color change becomes greater, so it is black ink to be mixed with other color inks
  • recovery processing purging
  • black ink is a pigment type ink, it has compared to dye type ink, so it cannot be easily removed even if recov carried out.
  • the ink cartridges 14kl black ink are arranged at the end in the direction of arrangement in the cas supply part 120 (and needle 49) are shifted away from the color ink cartridg black ink should spatter, the spattered ink would be unlikely to adhere to th 49 Therefore, decline in printing quality can be suppressed, as can the amounts of ink for recovery processing
  • FIG. 50 the state of installation of the large ca cartridge 14k2 or black ink cartridge 14kl and color ink cartridges 14c in described Figure 50 is a simplified cross-section illustrating in simplified fa installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14kl and 14k2 inside case 40.
  • Figure 50 Furthermore, the space between accommodating grooves 42c 1 and 42 between accommodating grooves 42c2 and 42c3 provide a separation dista space between accommodating grooves 42c3 and 42c4 provides a separa longer than distance tl2 This is because, as discussed above, the black ink formed with a larger outer shape than the other color ink cartridges 14c, so t 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the black ink cartridge 14kl are at a p the difference between distance tl2 and distance tl3 in the direction away fr part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the other color ink cartridges direction in Figure 50).
  • the difference between distance tl2 and distance t the difference between gap tl ⁇ and gap tl7 between needles 49 desc corresponds to the difference between the higher of verticals wall parts 21 first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the height of vertical w 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure 13, or the di vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe of the first case member 1210 illustrated i
  • a prescribed space X is formed between the outer surface o 220 of the black ink cartridge 14kl and the inner surface of the side pl prescribed space X is formed to allow for the large capacity black ink cartrid as illustrated in Figure 50 (b), it serves to allow the refill unit 13 to be used ink cartridge 14kl and the large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2
  • Figure 51 (b) is a schematic drawing of case 2200
  • Case 2200 comprise case members 2210 and 2220, with the thicknesses of the first and second c and 2220 (the height of vertical wall parts 2210b to 221Oe and 2220b to 222 second case members 2210 and 2220, the left-right direction in Fig respectively tl9, which is approximately twice the thickness of tl8
  • Figure 51 (c) is a schematic drawing of case 1200
  • Case 1200 comprise case members 1210 and 220, with the thicknesses of the first and second ca and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe and 220b to 22O second case members 1210 and 220; the left-right direction in Figure 51(c)) first case member 1210 and tl8 for the second case member 220
  • three types of cases - 200 with different sizes of the outer shape (different inside volumes) are form case members of different thickness and two second case members of diffe the present embodiment, the thicknesses of the first and second case mem forming case 200 are equal, and the thicknesses of the first and second ca and 2220 forming case 2200 are also equal, but making the thicknesses equa not an indispensable condition for forming three types of cases - 200, 12 different outer shape sizes.
  • the thickness of one side is greater tha one side (the first case member 210) of the case members making up the cartridge (case 200), and the thickness of the other side (the second case me case members making up the largest first ink cartridge is greater than the types of dies being necessary if dies are fabricated for all the cases.
  • 1200 and 2200 have a space inside them, at least two members are necessary of them, for instance, a vessel main body open on one surface and a lid mem that opemng Thus, with three cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different s members are necessary.
  • the second case member 220 for black is made commo case member 220 for color.
  • a special die is not necessary for the sec 220 for black, providing a reduction in costs
  • the first case memb merely involves making the first case member 210 for color deeper and pro
  • the tip side of the vertical wall parts 1210b to 1210e past the rib 121 member 1210 used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertic to 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore, the first ca and 210 can be manufactured by using a common die for the main portio members 1201 and 210, and changing between a member corresponding member 210 and a member corresponding to the first case member 1210.
  • Furthermo case member 2210 for large capacity black has the same shape as the first c for black but without the rib 1218, a common die can be used for the main p case members 210, 1201 and 2210 In this way, even when there are mult cartridges 144c, 14kl and 14k2, a cost reduction can be achieved by using much as possible
  • cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from e through-holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part the outside are made the same shape, and substantially semi-circular case case 200 and a first case member 1210 formed to substantially the same shap member of case 2200
  • the vertical wall parts 210b to 22Oe of case members 2210 and 2220 are formed to be substantially eq outside shape sizes of the case 1200a and case 1200 are substantially the sam
  • FIG. 52 a second embodiment will be described drawing illustrating the ink cartridge 3014 and refill unit 3013 of the sec Figure 52 (a) is a drawing illustrating the side surface of the ink cartridge 3 embodiment, and Figure 52 (b) shows the cross-section in the state with 3014 installed in refill unit 3013 As illustrated in Figure 52 (a), the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon configured with a different location of the ambient air intake part 130 as co cartridge 14 of the first embodiment In the ink cartridge 3014 of the sec ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge 3014 through an ambient air inta formed in a labyrinth shape going from a through-hole 3130 formed
  • the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may comprise an ink 100 inside it, or may be configured such that ink is stored inside the case 320
  • FIG. 53 is a perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of the ink ca 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments.
  • Figure 53 (a) is a perspective vi outward appearance of ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment, and F perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartridge 50 embodiment
  • the ink cartridge 4014 of the third e through-hole 4130 for admitting ambient air into the ink cartridge 4014 form its top surface (the top surface in Figure 53 (a))
  • the air admitted through 4130 passes through a labyrinth shaped air intake passage 4131 (a relativ with a small inside diameter) and is admitted inside the ink cartridge 401 4132 is glued to the ink cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow of ink cartridge 4014 before use
  • the detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting outwa surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 4 direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is formed the ink supply part 41 which fills the opening of the joint 4122 and which is arranged in the dire side of the ink cartridge 4014 of this joint 4122, and a spring component 4 this valve 4123 in the direction of joint 4122.
  • the valve mechani closed the ink supply port 4121 is formed
  • the partition wall 4125 that side of the ink cartridge 4014 and the ink supply part 4120 is formed as a si ink cartridge 4014 itself As illustrated in Figure 53 (a), this partition wall 4 to store the valve mechanism.
  • the ink cartridge 5014 in the fourth examp is used in lieu of the ink supply part 4120 in the third example of embodi ink supply part 120 of the first example of embodiment and the similarly s part 5120
  • the remaining structure is the same as the ink cartridge in the embodiment, and therefore, the detailed explanation of this will be omitted
  • Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 in th embodiment
  • Figure 55 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within
  • the case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment forms the second protr and 224a3 which protrude in the direction of the case protruding parts 214b direction in Figure 54) towards the case protruding parts 214a and 214b second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3, the case protruding parts 214a a the truncated L (or V or U) shaped step 214a4 and 224a4 (concave part) as s view (in relation to the first case component 210, when seen from the top of downwards, or in relation to the second case component 220, when seen fr Figure 54 looking upwards) (see Figure 55)
  • the steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment are for (or V or U-shape) as seen from the side, but it is also acceptable to form th to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In other words, it is acceptable for i desired as long as it is a shape that will not come loose when attaching orientation and the edge of the protrusion is fitted into the steps 214a4 and 2 device 1 of the first example of embodiment Therefore, the structure o cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 of the sixth example of embodim in the first example of embodiment, and therefore, using the same refere items as in the first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will be As illustrated in Figure 56, in the multifunction device 1 of the s j embodiment, there is an ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960.
  • the control board 970 is a perform the main control of the multifunction device 1
  • the control board 970 includes a CPU calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory that cannot be over stores the control program and the fixed value data, a RAM 973 which is the be overwritten and which is used as the work memory, the EEPROM non-volatile memory that can be overwritten and which stores data even source is turned off, the PC interface 975 which performs electrical connect external PC 980 and the control board 970, the lnkjet printer 976 which per discharging ink as instructed by the CPU 971, the liquid crystal displa performs each type of display, the remaining ink detection sensor 57 which d of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and ink cartridge attachment dete that detects whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attached or not, and the int that performs input and output of each type of signal While it is not illustr there are also various counters and timers included, the updating of the co timer values will be performed according to the processing performed within the initial set-up process (not illustrated in the figure) after
  • the multifunction device 1 When the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1, in other has been detected, the multifunction device 1 will allow execution of the pri illustrated in the figure), and therefore, it is possible to avoid execution of th in the state in which it is unclear whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attach
  • the ink car flag 974a When each of the errors has been displayed, and if there is an abnormal executed, such as an operation of the abnormal deletion button, the ink car flag 974a will be initialized to 0.
  • Figure 59 is an angled view showing the external appearance of 6014 and 7014 of the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment
  • Figure 59(b) is an angled view showing the external app cartridge 7014 of the eighth example of embodiment
  • the ink cartridges 601 seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will be di to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth examples
  • the ninth example of embod is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 and refill unit 13 of the embodiment
  • the same parts as in the first example of embodiment have th attached and the explanation of these will be omitted
  • the struct member 65 of the door main body 60 in the mnth example of embodiment i in the first example of embodiment the explanation of this will be omitted.
  • the ink cartridge 8014 of the mnth example o a pushing part 8200a that is configured to contact the pressing retaining door main body 60 and that protrudes towards the outside from the side su cartridge 8014.
  • the pushing part 200a of the first example of one part of a specific range of the side surface 1 of the case 200, but the pr of the ninth example of embodiment has the structure where there is a contacts the pressing retaining member 61
  • the ninth example of embodi of the pushing part 8200a is such that it protrudes from the side surface, but form it in the opposite concave shape
  • the pressing retaining constructed such that it protrudes from the door mam body 61
  • this ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment is constructed reservoir element 100 is replaceable.
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of embodiment, and t structure that is different in relation to the ink cartridge 14 of the first examp will be described, and using the same references for the same parts as in th embodiment, the explanation of these will be omitted
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example o a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 200
  • This seal 9100 is maximum surface 220a and the vertical wall part 220c of the second case me vertical wall part 210c and the maximum surface 210a of the first case me words, the seal 9100 is attached to the side surface opposing the protector 3 edge surface on which the ink supply part 120, the ambient air intake detection part 140 are located)
  • the seal 9100 not only has the model of the i listed on it, but it also has imprinted on it the color corresponding to the ink is possible to visually recognize the color of the ink that is stored within 9014 Therefore, by attaching this seal 9100, it is possible for the use to visu ink color, making it possible to prevent storage of the ink cartridge 91 accommodating chamber 50 within the case 40
  • engagement parts 9200a and 9200b formed which protrude in th second case member 220 (in the Z direction,
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has underg the first case member 210 and the second case member 220, the adhesion onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, and the fitting of the 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b , Therefore union of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes it is possible to undo the connection between the first case member 210 an member 220 It is possible to simply perform the undoing of the connec engagement parts 9200a and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9 the edge of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement 9201b from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case c 223 have been formed
  • the seal part 9100 is a connecting member to connect the first members 210 and 220, and it serves as a hinge material, which can open a and second case members 210 and 220 Therefore, the replacement of element 100 is performed by undoing the connection between the engage and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, and when the sec 220 is open with respect to the first case member 210, the new ink reservo inserted, and then, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are c present tenth example of embodiment, while the ink reservoir element 100 new one, it is also acceptable to use a product in which ink has been re-inj there is no remaining ink (or that there is no ink cartridge attached) There be no printing
  • Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir element 9300 of the ele embodiment
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 of the ele embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is formed through i using a resin material, and a bag element 9302 that has flexibility and which space to store the ink inside, and which is connected to the hard part 9301 T has a detection part (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the l 57a and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection senso supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the supply c example of embodiment .
  • a detection part (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the l 57a and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection senso supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the supply c example of embodiment .
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example o manufactured using the hard part 9301 and the bag part 9302, and therefor have a simplified structure in comparison to the case where the entirety of element is formed through a molding using a resin material Therefore, improve the yield when manufacturing the ink reservoir element 9300, ma achieve a reduction in manufacturing costs
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of embodimen the bag part 9302 which forms the reservoir space to store the ink, and so w light that is emitted from the light emitting part 57a. Therefore, while it detect the amount of ink remaimng within the bag part 9302, it is possible there is an ink reservoir element 9300 contained within the first and seco and therefore, it is possible to prevent any printing processes from being multifunction device 1 while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not containe and second case menbers
  • Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams to explain the m of the combinations of the case members
  • the three types of cases 200, 1200 (or 1200 ⁇ ) and 2200 differing sizes for the outer shapes using the two types of first case mem case members 1210 and 2210 with different thicknesses, and the two type members 220 and second case member 2220 with different thicknesses
  • the case members in this modified example can be formed cases with differing sizes of outer shape from four case members (where the is different)
  • Figure in Figure 65 (a) case Cl is formed of a case member 120 and a case thickness of the case member 120 is t20 and the thickness of the case me which is thicker than the thickness t20
  • case C 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65(d) are formed More specif formed of the case member 120 and the case member
  • the small scale case C5, the l and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C6 are formed Also, the size outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 are all different, with C5 ⁇ C6 ⁇ C3 ⁇ C2. Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with differ according to the amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120,
  • Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in Figure 65, the explanat omitted here As illustrated in Figure 67 (b), the case C7 is formed of the cas the case member r22 The thicknesses of the case members 122 and r22 are f
  • the case C3 ill 67(c) and the case C8 illustrated in Figure 67(d) are formed More specifical formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and the case C8 case member 122 and the case member r21. Further, the difference between of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is difference between the thickness t22 of the case member 122 and the thickne member 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
  • hook 626 and 726 in the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 i connect the supply (ambient air) slider 640 (740) and the first and second su springs 630 and 650 (730 and 750) as one unit, and to have a construct unified supply (ambient air) slider and the first and second supply (ambien move freely part 614 and the joint contact part 613 of the supply joint 610 was formed form, it is also acceptable to form a groove around the periphery of the joi the supply joint.
  • any displacement of the joint protruding part wil this groove, it is possible to reduce displacement in the insertion direction o part as the needle 49 is inserted Further, by increasing the inner diameter o part in relation to the inner diameter of the joint protruding part, it is possi transmission of the displacement of the joint protruding part to the joint cont
  • the second opemng 112b side is closed by the side wall, a construction in which the film 160 is welded to the first opemng 112a, it is film 160 on the side wall of the ambient air connection passage 433, mak reduce the formation of a memscus on the ambient air connection passage case of closing the second opening 112b with the side wall, that side wa support substrate, and as this will provide the strength of the frame part, i have a construction in which the connection formation part (partition connected within the ink reservoir chamber, is not used.
  • the film 160 that is welded o was constructed of a nylon layer on the frame part 110 side, but it is also acc water-resistant coating onto this nylon layer By using this type of construct to prevent the formation of a meniscus on the ambient air connection passage
  • the ambient air comm forming part 430 was constructed such that it sloped downwards towards th.
  • the weldin performed using ultrasonic welding
  • t case 200 can be substituted with attachment using an adhesive as it is only i that the first and second case members 210 and 220 do not separate.
  • the ink cartridge and the ink jet recording apparatus of the present inv used for home and office uses

Abstract

An ink cartridge includes: (a) a case provided with an ink chamber configured to store ink therein, the ink cartridge configured to supply the ink stored in the ink chamber to an ink jet recording apparatus when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording apparatus, the case including; and (b) an end surface serving as a side surface when the ink cartridge is in an installation posture where the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording apparatus. The end surface includes: (c) an ink supply part configured to supply the ink in the ink chamber to the ink jet recording apparatus; and (d) a first projection projecting outwardly from the end surface. When the ink cartridge is in the installation posture, at least a part of the first projection is disposed on a line vertically passing through a center of an opening of the ink supply part.

Description

DESCRIPTION
INK CARTRIDGE AND INK JET RECORDING APPARATUS Technical Field
The invention relates to ink cartridges and ink jet recording apparat an ink cartridge configured to prevent ink from dripping inside an ink jet re when the ink cartridge is attached to and removed from the ink jet recording Background Art
EP 0 478 244 A2 discloses an ink cartridge which has a project erroneous loading As disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No 2005- an ink jet recording apparatus in which a plurality of ink cartridges are pl with their wider surfaces lying down A container body of the ink cartrid surface formed with an ink supply port An ink supply needle provid recording apparatus is inserted into the ink supply port so that ink in the ca to the mkjet recording apparatus The container body of the ink cartridg bag inside, communication between an inside and an outside of the ink bag seal supply lid The seal supply lid includes a spring seat mside The s toward the seal supply lid by a spnng, and the seal supply lid and the spring with each other, thereby interrupting the communication Thus, when the is inserted into the ink supply port, the spring seat is pressed in a directi urging direction, and an ink passage is provided
Disclosure of the Invention
However, in the above described mkjet recording apparatus, th formed so as to project horizontally. If ink adheres to the tip of the ink sup installation and removal of the ink cartridge, the adhered ink may drip during installation and removal of the ink cartridge may drip from the ink outside In this case, the inside of the ink jet recording apparatus is liable t both the ink adhering to the tip of the ink supply needle and ink dripping fr port In the above ink cartridge, the ink supply port is formed in the first cartridge Another-type of ink cartridge is provided with an ink supply outward from the first surface, and an ink supply port formed at an end portion. Even if the ink cartridge is provided with the ink supply port, the end of the ink supply portion, ink running may occur on condition tha has a valve mechanism using an urging force and is placed with its wider s In other words, in the ink jet recording apparatus in which the ink cartridg mechanism using the urging fore is placed with its wider surface lying do liable to occur and the installation portion is liable to get soiled regardless ink cartridge The invention is made to solve the above drawbacks, and has an o ink cartridge and an ink jet recording apparatus that can reduce ink runnin recording apparatus during installation and removal of the ink cartridge
The object is solved by an ink cartridge according to claim 1 and a apparatus according to claims 19 or 20 Further developments are given claims
In claim 1, the "case" of the invention is a thing designed to shap ink cartridge, and the ink chamber disposed inside the case may be defined the case The "end surface" of the invention is not limited to just a thing c a surface The end surface may include an area defined as an end of the ca In claim 9, the position adjacent to the lower end of the case is belo of the case with respect to the vertical direction With a simple structure wh getting soiled inside with the ink Even if the ink supply part has a valve an urging force, the lnkjet recording apparatus can be prevented from ge with ink because the ink runs onto the first projection In addition, eve part projects outward from the end surface of the case, the first projecti outward than the ink supply part, and dirt due to ink can be reduced, irres cartridge shape
According to another aspect of the invention, the first projection pr when the ink cartridge is m the installation posture Comparing a ca projection is inclined downward, ink running onto the first projection can running further down
According to another aspect of the invention, the first projection i when the ink cartridge is in the installation posture, at least a part of the disposed on a line vertically passing through a center of the opening of th Thus, ink running from the opening of the ink supply part can be reliably first projection
According to another aspect of the invention, the opening of th completely falls within an area occupied by the first projection when the i installation posture is viewed in a vertical direction Namely, the first pr wider than the opening of the ink supply part with respect to the horizontal ink running from the opening of the ink supply portion can be reliably rece projection
According to the ink cartridge of the invention, the surface of t which faces the ink supply part is formed flat or recessed and can prevent the first projection from running further downward According to the ink cartridge of the invention, the first projectio lower end of the case, and the ink supply part is disposed in a position close disposed at a lower end of the case, so that ink can be consumed well It is ink cartridge has the first projection disposed at the lower end of the case
According to another aspect of the invention, the first projection, at a lower portion when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet rec includes an inclined surface extending upward continuously from a bottom Thus, the ink cartridge can be installed smoothly. Unless the first proj inclined surface, when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording a portion of the first projection may collide with the insertion opening of th apparatus, and the ink cartridge may not be installed smoothly According to another aspect of the invention, the first projectio operate an installation detection switch disposed in the ink jet recording a ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording apparatus Thus, the first only reduce ink running but also detect whether the ink cartridge is installe the first projection projects further than the ink supply part projects, the ins switch can be disposed inward, with respect to a direction where the ink car deeper than at least a place where ink is supplied If the installation d disposed toward the front, it may contact other elements of the ink cartridge, damaged and detection errors may occur As the installation switch can be occurrence of damage and detection errors can be reduced According to another aspect of the invention, the ink cartridge radiated part configured to be radiated with light emitted from an optical s the ink jet recording apparatus When the ink cartridge is installed in the apparatus, the light is applied to the light radiated part Thus, it is poss detect whether the ink cartridge is installed based on a detection result of t In addition, by use in conjunction with a detection result of the installation the reliability to detect the installation of the ink cartridge can be improv According to another aspect of the invention, the light radiated pa an inner space communicating with the ink chamber, and the movable configured to move in response to a change of an ink level in the ink cham the inner space Thus, the amount of light received by the optical senso As a result, with the ink cartridge installed, the remaining amount of ink c tne optical sensor
According to another aspect of the invention, the first projection pr direction as the extracting member extends Thus, if ink adhering t extracting member runs down, the ink running down can be received onto t and thus the ink jet recording apparatus can be prevented from getting addition, as the ink jet recording apparatus includes an accommodating space corresponding to a contour of the ink cartridge and configured t cartridge installed in a horizontal direction Thus, this can prevent the pr of the extracting member and the first projection from deviating from installation and removal of the ink cartridge As a result, ink running fr extracting member can be accurately received onto the first projection
According to another aspect of the invention, the installation detect that the ink cartridge is installed when the installation detection device r installation detection switch has been operated and an amount of light that received has been changed, and the controlling device allows the recording recording when the installation detection device detects that the ink cart Thus, installation detection is performed using a detection result of the ins switch and a detection result of the optical sensor, the reliability to detect the ink cartridge can be improved Thus, as the recording device does not when the ink cartridge is not installed, the occurrence of recording errors In addition, it is possible to detect abnormality of one of the optical sensor Brief Description of Drawings
Further features and advantages will arise from the followi embodiments when taken in conjunction with the enclosed drawings, of whi FIG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the multi the present invention
FiG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit
FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill unit FIG 4 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figure 2 alon FiG. 5 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figure 2 alon FiG 6 is an exploded perspective view showing the door of the refill unit
FiG 7 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the color i
FIG. 8 is an angled diagram showing the details of the color ink cartridge
FiG 9 IS a diagram showing the protector, where (a) is a top-surface diagra in Figure 8 as seen from the IXa perspective, and (b) is a cross-se the protector in Figure 9(a) along the IXb-IXb line
FIG 10 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the black i
FIG 11 is an angled diagram showing the details of the black ink cartridge
FIG 12 IS an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the large cartridge FiG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large capacity black iG 14 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is a fro reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink reservoir element iG 15 IS a diagram showing the supply path formation part, where (a) is a summary of the supply path formation part (a side view of the fra cross-sectional diagram showing the supply path formation part in the XVb-XVb line, (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the IS a diagram showing the injection path formation part, where showing a summary of the injection path formation part, and (b) i diagram of the injection path formation part in Figure 17(a) along
Figure imgf000009_0001
IS a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) is a di summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a cross-sectional diagra part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIb-XVIIIb line, and (c) is a cross- of the detection part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line. is a diagram showing the sensor arm, where (a) is a front view of t (b) is a diagram showing the sensor arm in Figure 19(a) along perspective is a diagram showing one part of the ink reservoir element, wher showing the side of the ink reservoir element, (b) is a diagram showi front of the ink reservoir element, and (c) is a cross-sectional diagra along the XXc-XXc line is a diagram showing the details of the ink reservoir element is an exploded diagram of the ink supply mechanism and the a mechanism, where (a) is an exploded diagram of the ink supply mec an exploded diagram of the ambient air intake mechanism is a diagram showing the supply cap, where (a) is a diagram showi supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surface of the supply c along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the pl supply cap, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the suppl cross-sectional diagram of the supply cap in Figure 23 (c) along t
Figure imgf000009_0002
is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagram show supply valve, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the su is a cross-sectional diagram of the supply valve in Figure 25(c) alon line is a diagram showing the first supply spring, where (a) is a diagra of the first supply spring, (b) is a diagram showing the planar s supply spring, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the f and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram of the first supply spring in Figu
XXVId-XXVId line is a diagram showing the supply slider, where (a) is a diagram sh the supply slider, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the supply sli along the arrow XXVIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the the supply slider, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the (e) is a cross-sectional diagram of the supply slider in Figure XXVIIe-XXVIIe line is a diagram showing the valve seat, where (a) is a diagram showi valve seat, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the v diagram showing the bottom surface of the valve seat, and (d) is diagram of the valve seat in Figure 28(b) along the XXVIIId-XXVIII is a diagram showing the check valve, where (a) is a diagram show check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the ch diagram showing the bottom surface of the check valve, and (c) is diagram of the check valve in Figure 29(a) along the XXIXd-XXIXd is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram showing the
(b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the cover, (c) is a dia bottom surface of the cover, and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram of t
30(b) along the XXXd-XXXd line. is a diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) is a diagram of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cross-sectional diagram of the ambient air joint in Figure XXXIId-XXXIId line. is a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a diagram s the ambient air valve, and (b) is a diagram showing the bottom surf air valve is a partial cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism have been asse supply unit and the ambient air intake unit is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes pπor to welding is a diagram showing the welding processes for the film, where showing the welding surface of the film onto the frame part, and showing the welding process to weld the film onto the frame part is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that are perfor welding, where (a) is a diagram showing the attachment process supply mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism onto the f diagram showing the pressure reducing process, and (c) is a diagra injection process is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, where showing the process to sandwich the frame part by the case, and showing the welding process to weld the case IS a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that are pe shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagram showing the pr protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showing the process to package ink remaining withm the ink reservoir chamber, where (a) shows there is ink remaining, and (b) shows the state in which there is no in is a diagram showing the operation theory of the sensor arm diagr is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong orientation is a diagram showing the method of removing the ink cartridg recording device is a diagram showing the front perspective of the ink cartridge and t is removed from the multifunction device is a diagram showing the structure to reduce adherence of the ink surface of the detection part of the ink cartridge, where (a) shows the ink cartridge has been removed from the refill unit, (b) is a dia surface on which the detection part is formed on the ink cartridge, a view of the ink cartridge is a diagram showing the front of the case, where (a) is a front vie can store either the large capacity blank ink cartridge or the black in color ink cartridge, and (b) is a front view of the case that can st cartridge and the color ink cartridge is a cross-sectional diagram showing a summary of the cross se where (a) is a cross-sectional diagram showing a summary of the ca along the XXXXIXa-XXXXIXa line, and (b) is a cross-sectional d summary of the case in Figure 48(b) along the XXXXIXb-XXXXIX is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which each ink attached within the case is a diagram showing the combination of the case members diagra is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit accordi showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge according to th embodiment, and (b) is an angled diagram showing the external app cartridge according to the fourth example of embodiment
FiG 54 is an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge according to the embodiment
ΛG 55 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink cart the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the refill FiG 56 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink cart the sixth example of embodiment has been attached within the refill FiG 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the electrical structure o device according to the sixth example of embodiment FiG 58 is a flowchart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection proce by the CPU
FiG 59 IS an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink cart the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment, where (a) is a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge according to th of embodiment, and (b) is an angled diagram showing the external ink cartridge according to the eighth example of embodiment.
FIG 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit according to of embodiment
FiG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink c to the tenth example of embodiment FiG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartridge acco example of embodiment FIG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the ink reservo
FiG. 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to the ele reference to the attached drawings. Figure 1 is an oblique view showing multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 of the present invention is i
Printer part 11 is provided on the lower part of multifunction device 1, a is provided on the upper part of this printer part 11 Multifunction device 1 Function Device) in which printer part 11 and scanner part 12 are provide has various functions such as a printer function, scanner function, co facsimile function
Multifunction device 1 is primarily connected to a computer (external in the figure), and it records images or documents to recording paper us medium based on image data or document data sent from this computer M 1 can also be connected to an external device such as a digital camera (no figure) such that it records image data outputted from the digital camera t Moreover, by using receiver 2, multifunction device 1 can communicate another party and send image data to the device of the other party Furtherm device 1 is equipped with slot part 23, which is described below, and by loa of recording media such as memory cards into this slot part 23, the devic such as image data recorded on the recording medium to recording paper
In multifunction device 1, printer part 11 is configured as an inkjet rec refill unit 13, which stores ink that is supplied to a recording head (not figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is equipped at the base of th multifunction device 1 Refill unit 13 has a compact design and is config cartridge 14 can be easily replaced, and this will be described in detail belo
Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15, which functions as Scanner), and document cover 16, which is provided on the upper part of t 15 (top of figure 1) Document cover 16 is equipped with automatic docu Auto Document Feeder; called "ADF" hereafter) 17, and it is attached to between the document bed and document cover 16, and it is equipped with unit (not illustrated in the figure) on the inside A document is placed b cover 16 and the contact glass sheet, and the image reading unit reads document by moving along the contact glass sheet from the bottom of the co Document cover 16 is equipped with ADF 17, and this ADF 17 is conf dan consecutively feed up to a prescribed number of documents from do paper ejection tray 19 Moreover, ADF 17 has a known structure, so its d will be omitted. In this embodiment, a configuration that is not equipped also be used In this configuration, document cover 16 is opened by the us are placed on the contact glass sheet
Printer part 11 is equipped with an image recording part that has an inkj (not illustrated in the figure), and this is configured as an inkjet recording d 11 is equipped with refill unit 13 on the front side of multifunction devic Figure 1) and on the bottom side of multifunction device 1 (bottom side of words, refill unit 13 is built in to the front surface Ia side and the bottom multifunction device 1. In this embodiment, refill unit 13 is configured suc and hold four ink cartridges 14, and black, yellow, magenta, and cyan color each of these ink cartridges 14 The ink of each color stored in ink cartridge the recording head through ink tube 53 (see Figure 5) Moreover, opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes opening 21 of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure 1) is provided on t refill unit 13 (front of Figure 1) Opening/closing cover 20 is configured s freely rotated between a position in which it exposes refill unit 13 through position in which it closes opening 21 and houses refill unit 13 by folding i (front direction in Figure 1)
Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifunctio Operation panel 30 is attached to the top surface of the front surface sid device 1 (upper part of the front surface in Figure 1). This operation panel part for the purpose of performing the operations of printer part 11 and sca is equipped with various operation keys 31-34 and liquid crystal display pa operation keys 31-34 arranged on operation panel 30 are connected to a c control circuit board, not illustrated in the figure) used as a control mea major functions through flat cables not illustrated in the Figure In addit commands from the various operation keys 31-34, the control device pro from receiver 2 described above and controls the operation of multifunction in cases in which a device such as a personal computer is connected to multi the control device controls the operation of multifunction device 1 based o from this personal computer in addition to the instructions from operation p
Slot part 23 through which recording media such as various small me loaded is equipped on the bottom of operation panel 30 (bottom of Figure stored on the small memory card, and the image data (or information relat that is read out from the small memory card is displayed on liquid crystal di device is configured such that arbitrary images displayed on liquid crystal d be recorded to recording paper by the operation of operation panel 30
Next, refill unit 13 will be described with reference to Figures 2-6 Figu view of refill unit 13 Figure 3 is a side view of the state in which door 41 o been opened Figure 4 is a cross-sectional view of refill unit 13 through line and the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illustrated Figure 5 i view of refill unit 13 through line V-V of Figure 2, and the state m which in installed is illustrated Figure 6 is an exploded perspective view of door 41 Figures 3 and 4 illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is re
As illustrated in Figure 2, refill unit 13 is primarily equipped with case chamber 50 is formed such that it demarcates space corresponding to the o cartridge 14, and when each ink cartridge 14 is installed in case 40, it is h without rattling
As illustrated in Figure 2, case 40 is equipped with bottom plate part 4 43 that are provided on the left and right sides of this bottom plate part 42 on the back left side is not illustrated in Figure 2), and ceiling plate part 44 such that it spans the space between each side plate part 43, and the inside chambers 50 is further equipped with partition wall parts 47 (see Figure each accommodating chamber 50 The number of these partition wall pa determined by the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in case 40, and the they are arranged are determined by the thicknesses of ink cartridges 14 m t As illustrated in Figure 4, partition walls 47 are formed in a rib shape pro and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44 Further, parti do not need to completely partition each accommodating chamber 50, so t shape as long as the shape protrudes to the inside from at least one of botto ceiling plate part 44 and divides the space between adjacent accommodating
Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 2, cutout part 40a (opening part) formed on the back side of case 40 (back right side of Figure 2), and needl 48 is fitted into this cutout part 40a. Needle 49 (extraction member) th inside ink cartridges 14 is formed on needle forming member 48 based on cartridges 14 housed in accommodating chambers 50 of case 40
As illustrated in Figure 5, needle 49 extends along the direction of ope and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installation direction) in needle forming member 48 is engaged with cutout part 40a When an i installed in an accommodating chamber 50, this needle 49 is inserted into i (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge 14, and an ink supply path is formed as sup of case 40, which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure 5) When cartridges 14 is extracted through needle 49, ambient air corresponding to passes through passage 54 and is supplied into ink cartridges 14
Further, protrusion 55 that projects to the ink cartridge 14 side (left si formed on the top of passage 54. This protrusion 55 is a guide protrusion case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 described below (see Figure 8) More cartridge 14 is about to be installed upside-down, the upside-down inserti 14 is prevented by this protrusion 55. A detailed description of this backwards insertion of ink cartridge 14 is given below. A detailed descript structure of ink cartridge 14 is also given below
On the back side of case 40, remaining ink detection sensor 57, which of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge 14, is provided and passage 54 This remaining ink detection sensor 57 is a transmissive has light emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b, and it is provide number of ink cartridges 14 housed in accommodating chambers 50 Remai sensor 57 is provided in a position corresponding to detection part 140 (se cartridge 14 in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accom 50, and it is arranged in a position in which light emitting part 57a and li 57b can sandwich both sides of detection part 140 of ink cartridge accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detect connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink stored in eac is constantly monitored by this control device
Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves the ri Further, ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm mechanism 44b attached between swing arm mechanism 44b and ceiling plate part 44 mechanism 44b is always elastically biased in the direction of door 41 chambers 50 In other words, each accommodating chamber 50 is succ inside case 40 on each opening 45, and the four ink cartridges 14 are respec and removed from each accommodating chamber 50 through openings 45
Door 41 opens and closes opening 45, and is provided on each openin of door 41 switches between a position in which it closes opening 45 (bl with the 1st, 3rd and 4th door 41 from the back in figure 2 and a position opening 45 (open position), as with the 2nd door 41 from the back left opemng 45 can thereby be opened and closed When door 41 is in the blo cartridge 14 is reliably held inside accommodating chamber 50, and when open position, ink cartridge 14 can be easily inserted into and removed fro chamber 50
Here, the structure of door 41 will be described in detail with reference 41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61 that i door main body 60, door lock member 62 (lock bar) that fastens (locks) d and lock release lever 63 that releases door 41 from the fastened state D pressing retaining member 61, door lock member 62, and lock release molded using resins
As illustrated in Figure 6, door main body 60 is roughly formed into a of a long and thin rectangle The external shape of door main body 60 is fo the shape of opening 45 of case 40 Rotating shaft part 64, which is supp part of the front surface of case 40, is formed on the bottom end of do
(bottom side end in Figure 6) Specifically, bearing part 42a is formed o bottom plate part 42 of case 40 (see Figures 2, 3, and 4), and rotating sha into this bearing part 42a such that it can rotate freely As a result, door close opening 45 by standing up or open opening 45 by folding over
Pullout member 65, which is formed as a unit with door mam body 60, chamber 50 (bottom surface inside accommodating chamber 50 that make bottom surface of ink cartridge 14, see Figure 4) Door main body 60 rotat shaft part 64 as a rotational center, and as a result, pullout member 65 th L-shape also rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational cente changes to the open position (state illustrated in Figure 3), curved part 65b #5 rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational center At this time, rotation of curved part 65b, outer wall surface 65c changes from a state roughly perpendicularly (state illustrated in Figure 4) to a roughly hori illustrated in Figure 3) The length of extension part 65a of pullout mem prescribed dimension, so when curved part 65b is rotated, outer wall surf higher than installation surface 51 of case 40 and is roughly parallel to instal
Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides ink installation surface 51 inside accommodating chamber 50 in the state in w the open position As a result, pullout member 65 functions not only as a ink cartridge 14 out of accommodating chamber 50, but also as a guidi inserting ink cartridge 14 into accommodating chamber 50
In this embodiment, two pullout members 65 are provided on each door other words, pullout members 65 are configured such that they are positi width direction of door main body 60 and support ink cartridge 14 by san width direction Moreover, in this embodiment, the spacing between ea members 65 is set to be smaller than the width direction of ink cartridge 14
Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member 61 suc to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodating part 60a, in housed, is provided on door main body 60 Claw accommodating part 60a i a groove that extends in a direction that is roughly perpendicular to the lon of door mam body 60 (vertical direction in Figure 6) Claw 61a is Figure 4) Moreover, coil spring 66 is placed between pressing retaining me main body 60 Therefore, pressing retaining member 61 is elastically bia always in the projected position
When door 41 is in the blocked position, pressing retaining member with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 and is displaced to the retreated p relatively pressed by ink cartridge 14 (state illustrated in Figure 4) As a re 14 receives the elastic force of coil spring 66 through pressing retaining pressed against the back side of case 40 (back side of the direction in which installed) Therefore, ink cartridge 14 is held in a state in which it is positio case 40
In this embodiment, pressing retaining member 61 is formed in the sh while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 61 (surface that the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when door 41 is in the blocked position flat surface, and a pair of projecting strips 61c is formed on this wall surfa when door 41 is in the blocked position, these strips 61c make contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14
Moreover, pressing retaining member 61 is configured such that, wh position, it presses slightly downward from the center position in the vertic cartridge 14 (vertical direction in Figure 4) In other words, pressing retain provided in a position in which it makes contact and presses downwar position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 This is for the purpose operationahty in the case in which the user operates door 41 For examp retaining member 61 is positioned at or above the center position in the ve ink cartridge 14, the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of loc so the distance between the part that is operated by the user and the member 61 becomes small Therefore, the force induced by coil sprin 14, it presses against the end of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 somet accommodating chamber 50, making it unable to hold ink cartridge 14 corr this embodiment, pressing retaining member 61 is positioned slightly position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 c held correctly and can be installed smoothly with a small amount of forc below the center position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 means the vertical direction of pressing retaining member 61 is positioned even lo in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14, and as long as this positio maintained, a portion of the top end of pressing retaining member 61 (upper may be above the center position of ink cartridge 14
Moreover, as will be described below, ink cartridge 14 of this embod with ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 on the side surfac surface that makes contact with pressing retaining member 61, and this in and ambient air intake part 130 are equipped with valve mechanisms havin In other words, they have a biasing force (first and second supply springs first and second ambient air springs 730 and 750) that presses the valves and ambient air valve 720) outward such that they block communication be and exterior or ink cartridge 14 Therefore, in order to reliably enable comm ink cartridge 14 and the exterior, the elastic force of pressing retaining embodiment is set such that it is larger than the elastic force of the valve supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 As a result, when ink cartri inside accommodating chamber 50, the ink inside ink cartridge 14 is relia ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink cartridge 14 Moreover, ink on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on the top part in the ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating chamber 50, so pressing ret presses against a position that is relatively close to the center position in the side of Figure 6), and seat part 62c (contact part) that projects in the directio case 40 continuing from the lower end of main shaft part 62a (lower side of
Door lock member 62 is supported such that it can advance and retr direction with respect to door main body 60 (vertical direction in Figure extends in the vertical direction on the top end of door main body 60. Slide extends in the vertical direction, is provided on main shaft part 62a of door Slide rail 60b of door main body 60 is inserted into this slide groove 6 member 62 is configured such that it can freely slide up and down
Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key part 62b 62a When door lock member 62 is fitted into door main unit 60, claw 62e accommodating part 60c provided on door main body 60 This claw accom is configured from a groove that extends to exactly a prescribed leng direction Therefore, when door lock member 62 slides upward or downwar contact with the inside wall surface of claw accommodating part 60c, and t lock member 62 in the vertical direction is thus restricted
The sliding range of door lock member 62 is defined as a result of the se of the groove that constitutes claw accommodating part 60c to a prescribed door lock member 62 slides upward with respect to door main body 60 an contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw accommodati lock member 62 is in the position in which it projects upward from the main body 60 When door lock member 62 slides downward with respect t 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the bottom edge of the inside wal accommodating part 60c, door lock member 62 is in the position in whic inside of door main body 60 In this specification, the position at which doo makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw accomm defined as the "projected position", and the position at which door lock The top surface of key part 62b of door lock member 62 is a sloped s downward Therefore, when door 41 changes from the open position to the the top surface of door lock member 62 makes contact with the top edge of 40, and when door 41 is rotated towards the blocked position, door lock me the inside of door mam body 60 as it is relatively pressed against the top e λ^lien door 41 then completely changes to the blocked position, door lock again projects from door main body 60, and key part 62b engages with th 40
At this time, key part 62b of door lock member 62 is in a state in whi lock member fitting part 46 (see Figures 2 and 5), which is provided o opening 45 of case 40 Door lock member 62 is elastically biased such that from door main body 60 due to coil spring 67, so it is pressed inside lock 46, but the position of door lock member 62 is an intermediate position s slightly more to the retreated position side than the projecting side Door l always elastically pressed against lock member fitting part 46 when it is i position, so door lock member 62 never easily deviates from lock member fi
Lock release lever 63 is formed into the shape of a rectangular plate, a the top of the outside of door main body 60 in a state in which it is fastene main body 60 is equipped with accommodating part 6Od, which houses loc This accommodating part 6Od consists of a concave part that is provided o 60 This will be described below, and when lock release lever 63 chang release lever 63 is fitted into accommodating part 6Od.
Supporting pin 63 a is provided on the bottom end of lock release leve time, pin support hole 6Oe, into which supporting pin 63 a is fitted, is provi body 60 Because supporting pin 63a is fitted into this pin support hole 6Oe, 63 is configured such that it can rotate freely around the rotational center "housed position", and the position of lock release lever 63 when lock r inclined at approximately 45° is defined as the "neutral position", while th release lever 63 when it is folded over roughly horizontally is define position" The bottom end of lock release lever 63 is interlocking cam 63b, and int is for sliding door lock member 62 up and down when the position of loc changes Because interlocking cam 63b is provided, when lock release l from the housed position, through the neutral position, and to the folded p member 62 slides from the projected position, through the intermediate p retreated position Put the other way around, when door lock member 62 i position, lock release lever 63 is placed in the housed position and door 4 the state in which door lock member 62 makes contact with lock member case 40, lock release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the house neutral position At this time, the central position of lock release lever 63 always moves to the neutral position due to its own weight Because loc arrives in the neutral position due to its own weight, it is possible operationally into the folded position
Here, the outline of the operation of lock release lever 63 will be descr cam 63b of lock release lever 63 makes contact with seat part 62c of door lo the state in which door 41 is closed (state illustrated in Figure 4), lock attempts to further rotate door lock member 62 through interlocking cam pressing downward However, door lock member 62 is always elastically coil spring 67, so door lock member 62 is not displaced by the action of t release lever 63 alone, and door lock member 62 is maintained in the interm However, when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for examp which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates and rotates lock blocked position to the open position
Door lock member 62 constantly receives the elastic force of coil sp rotational force that acts upon lock release lever 63 disappears - in other releases his or her hand from lock release lever 63 - door lock memb position in which it projects most from door main body 60, and lock r forcibly displaced to the housed position In other words, when door 41 is in lock release lever 63 is in the position in which it is almost completely h main body 60 Therefore, when replacing ink cartridge 14, because lock l completely housed inside door main unit 60, rotating is possible with rotati the center of rotation to the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so t replace ink cartridge 14 Moreover, the two strips 61c that are provided on pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing ink c accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation with a guide part between cu other words, when ink cartridge 14 is to be inserted into accommodating par load the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14 onto strips 61c, place the tip pa 14 between curved parts 65b, and then press ink cartridge 14 in accommodating chamber 50 Further, when ink cartridge 14 is to b accommodating chamber 50, the user should remove it until the botto cartridge 14 reaches the top of strips 61c from between curved parts 65b. When multifunction device 1 is in normal use, door 41 of refill unit 13 i release lever 63 is placed in the neutral position Therefore, as illustrated opening/closing cover 20 is opened when replacing ink cartridge 14, loc slopes to the front surface side As a result, there is the advantage that t operate lock release lever 63 Incidentally, as illustrated in Figure 1, refill u front surface Ia of multifunction device 1, so if lock release lever 63 is pla position (if it slopes to the front surface side), then it is necessary for a s unit 13 placed on the πm of opening 21, the inside wall surface of openin makes contact with lock release lever 63 when opening/closing cover 20 is opening/closing cover 20 is completely closed, lock release lever 63 is housed position as it is pressed by opening/closing cover 20 Therefore, in t compact design for multifunction device 1 can be realized
1 Next, ink cartridges 14 that are used in this embodiment will be descri to Figures 7 to 13 Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of storing ink in a magenta, yellow, and black colored ink is stored in each ink cartridge 1 regard to the structure of each ink cartridge 14, ink cartridge 14 that stores b such that it is slightly thicker than the ink cartridges 14 that store the other is because the demand for black ink is generally the highest and it is quantities and because black ink consists of pigmented inks, while color dyed inks, so when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities o be expended for the recovery process Therefore, the external shape of the b into a large shape such that colored ink and black ink can be visually con the structures of ink cartridges 14 that store colored inks are all formed into
First, colored ink cartridges 14 for storing colored ink will be described Figures 7 to 9. Figure 7 is an oblique view showing the external appearanc cartridge 14 Figure 8 is an exploded oblique view of the colored ink cartrid a diagram showing protector 300, and (a) is a top surface view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while (b) is a cross-sectional view of prot line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a) In the following description, the X-direct longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir e Y-direction indicates the height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink 100), which is orthogonal to the X-direction, and the Z-direction indicates t (thickness direction) of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir eleme ink cartridge 14 is fed As is clear from Figure 7, case 200 is formed parallelepiped that contains a pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a that o (cases 1200 and 2200 explained below are the same) In this embodi element 100, case 200, protector 300, and all of the members contained i described below are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal c'an be burned at the time of disposal For example, nylon, polyester, or pol used as resin materials
As illustrated in Figure 8, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipp 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores ink (inner space a including ink reservoir chamber 111), ink supply part 120, which supplies frame part 110 to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), ambient air intak introduces ambient air into frame part 110, detection part 140 (irradiat provided in order to detect the amount of remaining ink stored inside fr dispensing part 150, which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 16 to both sides of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8) i ink reservoir chamber on frame part 110 Descriptions of frame part 110, in
Figure imgf000028_0001
ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, ink dispensing part 150, an manufacturing process for ink reservoir element 100 will be given below.
Case 200 comprises two case elements 210 and 220 that sandwich ink 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8, Z-direction) First is a member that covers the bottom side surface of ink reservoir element 10 second case element 220 is a member that covers the top side surface of ink 100 in Figure 8 First and second case members 210 and 220 are made of r are manufactured using injection molding The depths of first and second and 220 (lengths in the upward direction of Figure 8 (lengths in the Z-dire such that they are roughly equivalent, and they are formed such that the sum vertical wall parts 210b-210e that are provided in roughly orthogonal d directions and Z-direction in Figure 8) from the outer edge portions of the plate-shaped part Regarding vertical wall parts 210d-210e, the vertical protector 300 side of first case member 210 is 210b, the vertical wall that this vertical wall part 210b is 210c, and the vertical walls that are respecti vertical wall parts 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe Figure 8 is vertical wall part 21Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical w
Two case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing ink su ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 are formed on vertical first case member 210 Case cutout parts 211 and 212 arc formed into ro shapes from the edges of vertical wall part 210b, and case cutout part 211 side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ink supply part 120, while ca on the left back side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ambient ai Rectangular case cutout part 213, which is cut out into a rectangular shape, i case cutout part 211 and case cutout part 212, and this is a cutout for insert detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) to the position at which it sandwiches d Contact groove 211a, which makes contact with ink supply part 120, is for surface connecting to case cutout part 211 of first case member 210, and co which makes contact with ambient air intake part 130, is formed on t connecting to case cutout part 212 of first case member 210 Because thes 212a and 212b are provided, the alignment of ink reservoir element 1 member 210 becomes easy
Moreover, two case projecting parts 214a and 214b, which project i protector 300 (left front direction and X-direction in Figure 8) from the surf cutout parts 211-213 are formed (vertical wall part 210b), are formed on 210 Case projecting parts 214a and 214b are formed on both sides of first of vertical wall part 21Od of the case member 210 (protector 300 direction, in Figure 8) When ink cartridge 14 is to be installed into multifunction de 1), it is installed such that case projecting part 214a is on the bottom side case in which ink cartridge 14 is installed, when sloping surface 214a2 bottom wall part 41 of refill unit 13, ink cartridge 14 is smoothly led installation position due to its slope
On case projecting part 214a, case projecting cutout part 214al, whic rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms the side of cas to 213 On case projecting part 214b, Case projecting cutout part 214bl, w into a rectangular shape, is also formed on the inside surface that forms the parts 211 to 213 These case projecting cutout parts 214al and 214bl are pr prevent the natural desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protect to case 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which below, are fitted into these parts (see Figure 9). Further, case fitting groove 214b2, which is used as a fitting part into w fitting part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) described below, is formed
Figure imgf000030_0001
part 214b This case fitting groove 214b2 is formed across a portion of verti from the edge of case projecting part 214b (edge of the protector 300 side)
Moreover, rod member 215a, which protrudes in the direction of second (Z-direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on the ink supply p front side of Figure 8) and determines the position of ink reservoir element case 200, and rod members 215b and 215c, which protrude in the directi member 220 (Z-direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Oe on the part 130 side (left back side of Figure 8) and determine the position of ink sealed inside case 200, are formed on first case member 210 The positio element 100 is determined by the three locations of these rod members 215 placed opposite this vertical wall part 220b is 220c, and the vertical walls th connected to vertical wall parts 220c and 220b are vertical wall parts 22Od side of Figure 8 is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is 22Od) Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure that is roughly s case member 210 As with first case member 210, three case cutout par formed on vertical wall part 220b, and contact groove 221a connected to ca and contact groove 222a connected to case cutout part 222 are also formed 221 and 222 are formed into the same shapes as case cutout parts 211 an member 210 (roughly semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is for shape as case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of case cutou and case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 that slopes in the cutout parts 221 to 223 towards the edge from the portion that connects to t of vertical wall part 21Od of second case member 220 Case projecting cuto illustrated in the figure) is formed on case projecting part 224a, and case part 224b 1 and case fitting groove 224b2 are formed on case projecting p portion of vertical wall part 22Oe from the edge of case projecting part 224 member 220, fitting hole parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) which rod members 215a-215c fit after passing through in the direction of 210 (Z-direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod members 21 case member 210 are formed
As described above, first case member 210 and second case ember 22 formed into roughly the same shapes, and when they are in the state in w reservoir element 100, roughly circular through-holes that expose a portion 120 to the outside are formed by case cutout parts 211 and 221, while prevention of the installation of the cartridge into refill unit 13 in the wron prevention of the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake par case projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a, and a protrusion ( part", or "one projecting part") that contπbutes to the prevention of th installation in the wrong position together with the protrusion that is projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a and the prevention of th such as ink supply part 120 is formed by case projecting part 214b and c 224b. These protrusions will be described in detail below Moreover, as is cl ink supply part 120 is positioned closer to the protrusion formed from ca 214a and case projecting part 224a than the protrusion formed by case pr and case projecting part 224b A through-hole into which projecting part 3 300 (see Figure 9) is loosely inserted is formed by case projecting cutou 224al, and a through-hole into which projecting part 330bl of protector 30 loosely inserted is formed by case projecting cutout parts 214bl and 224 groove in the shape of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped into which fir part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is fitted is formed by case fitting g 224b2
As is clear from the above explanations, first case member 210 and sec 220 do not only have the same overall external appearance, but they are details such as case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b and case c 213 and 221 to 223 also have the same shapes Therefore, when first case second case member 220 are resin-molded, their die shapes are similar, s with die design can be reduced
Next, the external shape of case 200 will be described On first and sec 210 and 220, vertical wall parts 210d, 21Oe, 22Od, and 22Oe (side surfaces directions (Y-direction) that are orthogonal to longitudinal direction 226, and the step portions on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left b 8) are second case welded parts 217 and 227
In the following explanation, longitudinal direction B of first and sec 210 and 220 (direction parallel to the X-direction) refers to the longitudin cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction or ink reservoir element 100, an direction of case 200
Here, first and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second case 220 First case welded part 226 is connected to case projecting part 224a in the s the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, it has concave part 226a, whi concave shape in the direction of the inside of second case member 220, an 226b that engages with pullout member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when removed from refill unit 13 (see Figure 1) Concave part 226a is a regio oscillating range when pullout member 65 rotates Case welded part 227 h which is formed into a concave shape in roughly intermediate positio direction B of second case member 220, and this latch part 227a is a part swing arm mechanism 44b (see Figure 2) in the state in which it is installed
Although a detailed description will be omitted here, concave part 216a the figure), engagement part 216b (not illustrated in the figure), and lat illustrated in the figure), which are formed with roughly the same shapes as engagement part 226b, and latch part 227a of second case member 220, a first case member 210
Next, protector 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 an diagram that shows protector 300, and Figure 9(a) is a top view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while Figure 9(b) is a cross-sectional vie through line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a) Protector 300 is a member for protecti 120 and ambient air intake part 130, in particular, of ink reservoir elem through-hole 310 is formed in order to protect this valve open part 721a
As illustrated in the top view of Figure 9(a), first protector fitting part 3 into the fitting groove formed by case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 formed in the vicinity of the end of the side of protector through-hole 31 (left side in Figure 9(a)). Second protector fitting part 330a, which through-hole formed by case projecting cutout parts 214al and 224al ( fastens protector 300 to case 200, is formed in the vicinity of the end of th the side on which first protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in second protector fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through-hol projecting cutout holes 214bl and 224b 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protecto is provided between first protector fitting part 320 and protector through-hol
Moreover, protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b, which are li the through-holes formed by case cutout parts 213 and 223 and the side wal 140 (see Figure 8), are formed in roughly intermediate positions in longitud protector 300 (Y-direction in Figures 8 and 9) Protector loose insertion pa are connected to both side walls formed parallel to longitudinal direction side walls in Figure 9(a)), and they are formed such that they project upwa the front side of the page in Figure 9(a) and on the side of ink reservoir ele 8). Multiple ribs are formed from the bottom surface of protector 300, and t the strength of protector 300
First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends in a dir direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (vertical 9(a), X-direction), and consists of protector vertical wall 321 provided fro of protector 300 and two protector vertical walls 322 that are connected to t opposite side as protector through-hole 310 from protector vertical wall Figure 9(a)) As illustrated in Figure 9(b), each protector vertical wall 322 inserted into the fitting groove When first protector fitting part 320 is inser groove, it is inserted as it is restricted by both ends of protector vertical extends in the Z-direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C (Y-directio protector vertical wall 322 in longitudinal direction C Here, if first protect is formed with roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by ca 214b2 and 224b2 (see Figure 8), the attachment of protector 300 takes time protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the fitting gr of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot be determined Howe inserted as it is restricted by protector vertical walls 321 and 322 at one surf protector vertical wall 321) and four points (ends of both sides of protector and two ends of protector vertical wall 322) the installation properties of improved, and mistaken installation can be prevented
As illustrated in Figure 9(b), protruding parts 330al and 330bl, whi from one another, are formed on the edges of second protector fitting parts the direction in which second protector fitting parts 330a and 330b mutual on the top side of Figure 9(b)), and shaft parts 330a2 and 330b2, whic roughly cylindrical shapes, are formed in the direction of the bottom surfac from these edges (downward in Figure 9(b)) Shaft parts 330a2 and 330 because protector 300 is formed from a resin material, and protector 30 removed as second protector fitting parts 330a and 330b are elastically defo direction
Here, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to Figures 10 is an oblique view that shows the external appearance of black ink cartri is an exploded oblique view of black ink cartridge 14 As illustrated in Figures 10 and 11, black ink cartridge 14 is config external profile is larger (the thickness (length in the Z-direction) is lar it is formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z-direction) t Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regard to first case descriptions of second case member 220, ink reservoir element 100, and p be omitted here Only the depth of first case member 1210 (the thickness of (length of Z-direction) in Figure 11) the differs from that of first case me rest of its configuration is the same, so it detailed description will be omitte
As illustrated in Figure 11, first case member 1210 comprises a plat forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe tha roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Z-direction in Figure edge portions of the four sides of this plate-shaped part Regarding vertica to 121Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 1300 side of first cas 1210b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b vertical walls that are respectively connected to vertical wall parts 121 vertical wall parts 121Od and 121Oe (the right side of Figure 11 is vertica and the left side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121Od) Black ink cartr such that the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe are vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 210e of first case memb ink, and the thickness of ink cartridge 14 is accordingly increased
As with first case member 210, case cutout parts 1211 and 1212, whic roughly semicircular shapes on vertical wall part 1210b, are formed on 1210 m order to expose ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 13 case 200, and case cutout part 1213, which is cut out into a rectangular between case cutout part 1211 and case cutout part 1212 Two case projectin 1214b are formed on both sides of first case member 1210, and case projecti sloping surface 1214a2 Rod members 1215a, 1215b and 1215c, which dete of ink reservoir element 100, are formed on first case member 1210 between ink reservoir element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled. It is th maintain the strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
Moreover, by making the external profile of black ink cartridge 14 l colored ink cartridge 14, it is possible to differentiate between black ink other ink cartridges 14. Black is a darker color than other colors, so it is not be mistakenly loaded into refill unit 13 and used However, because the black ink cartridge 14 is made large, it can be differentiated from other in mistaken installations can be reduced Further, accommodating chamber 5 13 is formed according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, so black ink ca installed into accommodating chamber 50 corresponding to a colored ink ca
In black ink cartridge 14, the thicknesses of first case member 1210 member 220 in the vertical direction (Z-direction) differ, so ink supply par supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positioned in positions shifte position in the vertical direction (biased position) Next, large-capacity black ink cartridge 14 will be described with refer and 13 Figure 12 is an oblique view that shows the external appearance black ink cartridge 14 Figure 13 is an exploded oblique view of large-c cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figures 12 and 13, the external profile of large-c cartridge 14 is configured such that it is larger (longer in the Z-direction) black ink cartridges 14 Specifically, the vertical wall heights of vertical w 222Oe of second case member 2220 are formed such that they are roughly wall heights of vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of second case member 220 member 2220, which constitutes case 2200, is simply made thicker than sec 220 for colored and black ink Moreover, in first case member 2210, whic 2200, rib 1218 of first case member 1210 for black ink is simply remo supply part 2120, ambient air supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 ar center position in the vertical direction
Corresponding to ink cartridges with the three types of sizes desc desirable for refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 to be configured such with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house cored ink cartridg Accommodating chamber 50 that selectively houses black ink cartridge 14 black ink cartridge 14 (the inner space of this accommodating chamb corresponding to large-capacity black ink cartridge 14) This is because the printing using only black ink is generally higher than that of color printing of multifunction device 1 in which refill unit 13 is configured such that i multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house colored ink cartridges accommodating chamber 50 that houses black ink cartridge 14 may be prov infrequently use text printing This will be described once again below
Next, ink reservoir element 100 will be described with reference to Figu a diagram that shows ink reservoir element 100, and Figure 14(a) is a reservoir element 100, while Figure 14(b) is a back view of ink reservoir state of ink reservoir element 100 illustrated in Figure 14 is the position in 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1). As illustrated in F position in which the longitudinal direction (X-direction) and the width dire of ink cartridge 14 (ink reservoir element 100) are horizontal directions, which ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, and detection part on the side surface, ink supply part 120 is positioned on the bottom part sid intake part 130 is positioned on the ceiling side Ink reservoir element 210 reservoir element 100 only with regard to its thickness (length in the X detailed description will be omitted here
As described above, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipped wi surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 are par largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded into case 200 Mo welded to both the front surface side and the back surface side of fram thickness of ink reservoir element 100 (length in the Z-direction), which is shape, can be reduced in comparison to the case in which both sides are materials
First, frame part 110 will be described in detail Frame part 110 is injection molding using a resin material, and it has translucence because translucent (or transparent). This is because, as described below, light th light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 positioned detection part 140 is transmitted to light receiving part 57b in order to det remaining ink in ink reservoir element 100
As illustrated in Figure 14(a), outer circumference welded part 400a, 160 to the vicinity of the outer edge part, and multiple inner circumference to 417a, which are provided on the inside of this outer circumference wel formed on the front surface side of frame part 110 Outer circumference wel vertical wall that demarcates the inner space of frame part 100 (space o chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111). Moreover, the blackened ed inner circumference welded parts (ribs or first ribs) 411a to 417a illustrat are welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or first rib fixed parts), and the front (blackened portion) of outer circumference welded part 400a is the welded part) on the periphery of first opening 112a. Film 160 is welded to this weld ultrasonic welding
As illustrated in Figure 14(b), outer circumference welded part 400b, 160 to the vicinity of the outer edge part, and multiple inner circumference to 417b, which are provided on the inside of this outer circumference wel (blackened portion) of the outer circumference welded part 400b is the w (fixed part) on the periphery of the opening Film 160 is welded to thi ultrasonic welding
The inside of outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b constit chamber 111 in which ink is stored The region on the front surface side ill 14(a) is first chamber Il ia of ink reservoir chamber 111, and the region o side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second chamber 111b of ink reserv Moreover, outer circumference welded part 400a illustrated in Figure 14( 112a of frame part 110, and outer circumference welded part 400b illustrat is second opening 112b of frame part 110
Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 420 (see 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 and supplies ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside, ambient air communicating passage (see Figure 14(a)), which communicates with ambient air intake part 13 ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111, plate-shaped link forming part 14(a) and 14(b)), which is formed in roughly the center of frame part 110 chamber 111) and connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 to t dispensing part 150, and dispensing passage forming part 450 (see Fig communicates with ink dispensing part 150 and dispenses ink into ink reser Here, link forming part 440 partitions first chamber Ilia and second cha reservoir chamber 111 in a state in which they communicate with one a linking plate that is between virtual plane R (not illustrated in the figure), i that is welded to outer circumference welded part 400a extends, and vir illustrated in the figure), in which film 160 that is welded to outer circumfe 400b extends, and extends in a plane parallel to these virtual planes This 440 will be described in detail in a later process Ambient air passage fo region containing supply path forming part 420, ambient air communicatin part 430, link forming part 440, and dispensing passage forming part 45 communicating passage forming part 430 is an ambient air passage for in air into ink reservoir chamber 111, so it may alternatively be provided as a ink reservoir chamber 111 of frame part 110 (inner space) This means that reservoir chamber 111 (inner space) described above excluding ambient a passage forming part 430 is essentially considered the space in which ink is
Moreover, on the outer edge of frame part 110, thin plate-shaped pr formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Figure 14(a) a Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top part of Figure 14( Figure 14(b)), and through-holes 460a to 460c, into which rod members Figure 8) of first case member 210 described above are inserted, are protruding parts
First, inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a will be described Figure 14(a) Inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a consist of in welded part 411a, which is provided on supply path forming part 420, in welded part 412a, which is provided on ambient air communicating passage and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 417a, which are provided on 440 Moreover, the welded surface parts of inner circumference welded part positioned on the same virtual plane as the welded surface part of outer circ part 400a, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane R)
Inner circumference welded part 411a is provided on supply path formi consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction th longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (see Figure 8, left/right directio Inner circumference welded part 412a forms one side wall (vertical wal connection passage 433, which will be described below, in ambient ai (vertical direction in Figure 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are Inner circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudinal directi 110, a vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a directio orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, and a downwa wall that slopes from this vertical wall in a direction that intersects with lon B of frame part 110 Inner circumference welded part 415a consists of a v parallel to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, a vertical wall th perpendicularly such that it faces the direction of the bottom part of frame vertical wall, and a vertical wall that slopes downward from this vertical that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (Y circumference welded part 416a is provided in the vicinity of ink dispensi consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction t longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 Inner circumference welded par in the vicinity of ink dispensing part 150, and it consists of a vertical wall direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of fram downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes from this vertical wall in a direc with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110
In other words, at least a portion of the vertical walls of inner circumfer 411a to 417a extends in a direction that slopes downward or is roug longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (in other words, the bottom reservoir chamber 111 in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installe this bottom part side (bottom part side in Figure 14(a)) is a free end As a multiple inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a are provided on t circumference welded part 400a in order to suppress the slackening of fil 160 is to be welded to frame part 110, these multiple inner circumference formed with roughly the same shapes as inner circumference welded pa circumference welded parts 413a to 417a descnbed above and in position those of inner circumference welded part 411a and inner circumference we 417a, and only inner circumference welded part 412b is formed with a diffe different position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a Mo surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are positi virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circumference wel film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane S)
Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumference which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumference wel direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame par and inner circumference welded part 412b2, which likewise consists of a extends from outer circumference welded part 400b in a direction that is r to longitudinal direction B [of frame part 110] Inner circumference weld inner circumference welded part 412b2 are provided from plate part 438, ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 This is bec communicating passage forming part 430 is formed only on the front sur part 110, and inner circumference welded part 412bl and inner circumfe 412b2 are provided in order to suppress the generation of slack in film 1 corresponding to the back surface side of this ambient air communicatin part 430 Moreover, as with the front surface side, inner circumference we 417b become free ends and are spread around on the back surface side of well (scattered in multiple units), so they efficiently reduce the inhibition suppressing the generation of slack in film 160 Because inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 41 a spread-out orientation (scattered in multiple units), in the case in which c complex dies are not required when frame part 110 is to be injection-mol possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge 14.
Next, supply path forming part 420 will be described with reference to 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420 Figure 15 (a) is a d the outline of supply path forming part 420 (diagram of the back surface liO), Figure 15(b) is a diagram that shows a cross-sectional view of supply 420 through line XVb-XVb in Figure 15(a), Figure 15(c) is a diagram that which the amount of remaining ink has decreased, and Figure 15(d) is a d the state in which the supply of ink has been completed As illustrated in Figure 15(a), supply path forming part 420 is primar first supply communicating hole 421, which communicates with ink suppl partition wall 422, which is formed into a roughly triangular frame when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 15 (a) such that it enclose communicating hole 421, plate part 427, which covers the region on th partition wall 422 and extends parallel to virtual planes R and S between t supply communicating hole 423, which is formed as a portion of supply pa cut out, supply concave part 424, which is formed by making a portion of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part of Figure 15(a), portion of wall part forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber 111 in outer circumference into a concave shape (stepped shape), plate part 428, which extends from o welded part 400b and supply partition wall 422 and extends parallel to virt between the planes, arm sandwiching part 425, which is provided on the fre 428 and has sensor arm 470 ("displacement member", see Figure 19) th rotating member (described below), and inner circumference welded pa provided in the direction of detection part 140 (see Figure 14(b)) from this part 425 Moreover, film 160 is welded to supply partition wall 422, and i height direction (Y-direction) of cartridge 14, and it constitutes the portio positioned on the bottommost side (lowest side) of ink reservoir chamber 11 Figure 15(a), first supply communicating hole 421 is formed above bottom height as the top end of recessed space 424a), and second supply communi formed below bottom part 400bl In other words, second supply communi positioned on the lower side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part side) first supply communicating hole 421 Arm sandwiching part 425 is for leftward-facing C shape when viewed from the direction perpendicular to t 15(a), and a portion of the side opposite ink supply part 120 (left side i opened As illustrated in Figures 14(a) and 14(b), welded part 411b and described above are provided such that they face the opposite sides as one part 428.
As illustrated in Figure 15(b), supply partition wall 422 is formed suc 160 is to be welded, it separates the inside of frame part 110 (ink reservoir first supply communicating hole 421 In other words, ink supply chamber 4 by supply partition wall 422 communicates with the inside of frame part second supply communicating hole 423 As a result, ink that is stored mside supplied into ink supply chamber 426 from second supply communicating p is then supplied to ink supply part 120 from first supply communicatin illustrated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) (ink flow path))
Next, ink flow path D, through which ink inside frame part 110 is supp part 120, will be described with reference to Figures 15(c) and 15(d) As ill 15(c), when liquid surface I of ink that is stored inside frame 110 is hi concave part 424, the ink is supplied to ink supply part 120 through t indicated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) In this case, recessed space 424a is the mside of ink supply chamber 426 that is enclosed by supply partition shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) is inserted into first supp hole 421 Therefore, taking into consideration the space occupied by ink s 500 and check valve 670, there is a limit to the formation of first supply co 421 on the bottom side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (frame part 110) In which supply partition wall 422 is not provided, when liquid surface I of th first supply communicating hole 421, it becomes impossible to supply the i of the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 becomes poor However, by sup partition wall 422 and forming second supply communicating hole 433 o side lower than first supply communicating hole 431 , it is possible to supp surface I of the ink falls below second supply communicating hole 433, s facilitate the full use of the ink.
When ink is further supplied from the state illustrated in Figure 15(c) a of the ink drops below the upper end of supply concave part 424 and be second supply communicating hole 423, ambient air flows into ink sup enclosed by supply partition wall 422 through second supply communicatin a result, additional ink can no longer be supplied (state illustrated in Figure 1
As illustrated in Figure 15(d), a difference of distance tl is provided b that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber 111 in outer circumfe 400b and the lower end of second supply communicating hole 423 Here, communicating hole 423 is above part 400bl that forms the bottom par chamber 111, additional ink cannot be supplied after liquid surface I of the i supply communicating hole 423, so the full use of the ink becomes poor concave part 424 is provided, and it is configured such that second communi positioned lower than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoi distance tl. As a result, as illustrated in Figure 15(d), in the state in which has been completed, only a slight amount of ink remains in the vicinity of Debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave part 4 the difference of distance t2 is provided between second supply communic the bottom part side wall of supply concave part 424 (side wall on the lo 15(d)) As described above, when liquid surface I of the ink drops bel communicating hole 423, additional ink cannot be supplied, so the ink that supply communicating hole 423 and supply concave part 424 remains msi part 424 without being supplied to ink supply part 120 Dust or plastic deb inside frame part 110 when ink cartridge 14 is manufactured sometimes rem but the specific gravity of this dust or plastic debris is greater than tha remains in the vicinity of the bottom part of frame part 110 Therefore, as il 15(d), debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave part E is supplied to ink supply part 120 and supplied to multifunction device there is a possibility that ink clogging will occur, making accurate pri However, as described above, because distance t2 is provided betwe communicating hole 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply concave remains inside supply concave part 424, so the occurrence of ink clogging c
Next, ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 will b reference to Figure 16 Figure 16 is a diagram that shows ambient air com forming part 430 Figure 16(a) is an oblique view that shows the outli communicating passage forming part 430, Figure 16(b) is a diagram that communicating passage forming part 430 from the perspective of arrow XV and Figure 16(c) is a diagram that shows ambient air communicating pas 430 from the perspective of arrow XVIc in Figure 16(a)
As illustrated in Figure 16(a), ambient air communicating passage fo primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating chamber 431 , whi roughly rectangular parallelepiped that communicates with ambient air 431 and second ambient air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air c 433 are formed as film 160 is welded on the front side of Figure 16(a)
First ambient air communicating hole 434, which communicates with part 130, is formed on the side of second surface 437b that opposes first su ambient air communicating chamber 431 (second surface 437b is the surfac described above) In second ambient air communicating chamber 432, s communicating hole 435, which communicates with first chamber Il i chamber 111, is formed on the side of first surface 437a, and third ambient hole 436, which communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoi formed on second surface 437b (plate part 438) First ambient air communi formed on side wall surface 431a of first ambient air communicating chamb of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side in Figure 16), and communica is formed on side wall surface 432a of second ambient air communicating c side of first ambient air communicating chamber 431 (left back side i described above, one of the side walls of ambient air connection passage 43 lower side in Figure 16(a)) is inner circumference welded part 412a
In ambient air connection passage 433, communicating openings 433a communicate with first ambient air communicating chamber 431 and se communicating chamber 432, respectively, are formed on the side of first these communicating openings 433a^ and 433b have opening areas that smaller than the side wall areas of first ambient air communicating chamb ambient air communicating chamber 432 (side wall surfaces 431a an communicating opemngs 433a and 433b are formed) Because a part havi introduces ambient air with extremely small cross-sectional area (ambie passage 433) is provided (so-called labyrinth), the resistance of the flow p air passes through becomes large. As a result, it is possible to reduce the ev naturally returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 due to gravity. More cross-sectional area of ambient air connection passage 433 is made small, ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection p reduced Here, when ink penetrates into ambient air connection passage 4 formed, and it is sometimes impossible to introduce ambient air normal described above, because ambient air connection passage 433 slopes dow penetrates into the passage, the ink is returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 of meniscuses can be substantially prevented Further, ambient air connecti formed as a result of the welding of film 160, so at least one of the surfaces can be deformed by bending In other words, ambient air connectio configured such that its cross-sectional area changes easily Therefore, e forms, the meniscus can be easily broken due to the bending and deformatio so ambient air can be introduced normally A portion of the surface of s communicating hole 435 is also formed by film 160, so the formation second ambient air communicating hole 435 can be substantially prevented
Third ambient air communicating hole 436 is formed on the upperm ambient air communicating chamber 432 in the position in which ink cartri in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1) (state illustrated in Figure 16(a)) cases in which an amount of ink is stored such that a meniscus is formed o air communicating hole 435 and second ambient air communicating hol ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink reservoir chamber 111 thro air communicating hole 436
Next, the mechanism that prevents the leakage of ink from ambient a passage forming part 430 will be described with reference to Figures 16 described above, case 200 of ink cartridge 14 is formed into a cubic shape c largest surfaces that oppose one another, so when this is loaded onto a flat be case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connecti positioned on the lower side (the side of first chamber Ilia of frame part 11 and first surface 437a is the lower side), and Figure 16(c) shows the c cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positi side (the side of second chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side a 437b is the lower side)
As illustrated in Figure 16(b), when ink cartridge 14 is placed such connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side during the tra cartridge 14, the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 passes throug air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air communicating chamber 4 into first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Moreover, as described connection passage 433 communicates through communicating opening markedly smaller area than the side surface of second ambient air comm 432, so there are cases in which the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 do pass through ambient air communicating chamber 433 and penetrate into communicating chamber 431 In the state illustrated in Figure 16(b), liquid s has not reached the position of the opening of first ambient air communic even if ink cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage on the lower side, the efflux of ink from ambient air intake part 130 to t prevented
As illustrated in Figure 16(c), when ink cartridge 14 is placed such connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side during the feeding o the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows into second ambient a chamber 432, but liquid surface I of the ink does not reach the op communicating opening 433b of ambient air connection passage 433 As a r not flow into ambient air connection passage 433 from communicating ope 434 and the opening position of communicating opening 433b in symmetrical to ambient air connection passage 433, it is possible to prevent from ambient air intake part 130 Further, by making the cross-sectional a connection part 433 small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink flow of ink into first ambient air communicating chamber 431.
1 Here, link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to Figure 14 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 and ink dispensing reservoir chamber 111, and it is formed in roughly the center positio chamber 111. Therefore, link forming part 440 connects two locations that 110, so it is also a reinforcement member that maintains the strength of fra forming part 440 is also a divider plate that divides the chamber such th opening 112a and the side of second opening 112b are in roughly the sa (divider plate that divides first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111 chamber 111 in the state in which they communicate with one another) Link forming part 440 consists of ambient air side linking part 441, wh the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left side in Figure 14(a) or right sid using inner circumference welded parts 415a and 415b as boundaries, an linking part 442, which is provided on the side of ink dispensing part 150 (r 14(a) or left side in Figure 14(b)) On ambient air side linking part 441, in welded parts 413a, 413b, 414a, and 414b are respectively provided on the second openings 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewe perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back sid the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b), here, the direction p page is parallel to the Z-direction) from this ambient air side linking part upper end of the height direction (Y-direction) of ambient air side communicates with inner circumference welded part 412a of ambient a 442
First linking communicating hole 443, which communicates between f and second chamber 111b, is formed on ambient air side linking part 441, a fourth linking communicating holes 444-446, which connect first chambe chamber 111b, are formed on dispensing side linking part 442. communicating holes 443-446 are not formed on linking forming part 440, and second chamber 111b do not communicate in the center region of ink 111, so slight differences sometimes arise in the amounts of ink in first second chamber 111b If there are differences in the amounts of ink in first second chamber 111b, differences arise in the air pressure inside ink reser so the adverse effect that ink cannot be smoothly (or accurately) supplied ar forming linking communicating holes 443-446 such they are spread across 440, it is possible to make the amounts of ink in first chamber Ilia and sec equivalent and to supply ink smoothly (or accurately) The part enclosed by ambient air side linking part 441, dispensing side and ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 is first reservoir opening 113, which communicates between first chamber Ilia and second c the part enclosed by ambient air side linking part 441, dispensing side lin supply path forming part 420 is second reservoir internal opening 114, wh between first chamber Il ia and second chamber 111b In other words, the p ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111 and the part that supplies ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside communicate in the absence of link for without the division of first chamber I lia and second chamber 111b introduction of ambient air and the supply of ink can be performed in a stabl Linking rib 418a, which connects multiple inner circumference welde provided on the side of first opening 112a from link forming part 440, and connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to 4 formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintain the stren part 440 Moreover, linking ribs 418a and 418b are formed into thin- walle are formed with vertical walls that are lower than inner circumference welde and 412b-417b, so it becomes difficult to inhibit the flow of ink
1 Next, dispensing passage forming part 450 will be explained with refer Figure 17 is a diagram that shows dispensing passage forming part 450 diagram that shows the outline of dispensing passage forming part 450, an cross-sectional view of dispensing passage forming part 450 through line Figure 17(a) In dispensing passage forming part 450, in the position dispensed, it is in the highest part inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and flows downward in the direction of ink supply part 120 and ambient air inta
As illustrated in the figure, dispensing passage forming part 450 is p with dispensing cylinder part 451, which is formed into a roughly cyli which ink dispensing plug 520 (see Figure 21), which will be described belo dispensing communicating hole 452, which communicates between this di part 451 and the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111, roughly U-shaped di wall 453, which is provided from the outer surface of dispensing cylinder the provided edge forms the forms the welded surface part on which film 1 partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect to ink reser and second dispensing communicating hole 454, which forms the opening partition wall 453 The opened part of dispensing cylinder part 451 is openi formed on the outside end surface of frame part 110, and the surface that op 451a is bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451 The regio dispensing partition wall 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow
Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference welded p chamber 111, ink is dispensed in a state in which second dispensing comm is positioned on top and first dispensing communicating hole 452 is posi (position in which the Y-direction is the horizontal direction in Figure 17( sequentially passes through dispensing cylinder part 451 , first dispensing co 452, dispensing partition wall flow path 453a and second dispensing comm and the ink is dispensed until liquid surface I of the ink reaches the state ill 17(a) Dispensing partition wall 453 is formed roughly linearly fro communicating hole 452 to second dispensing communicating hole 454 dispensed smoothly without resistance When ink is dispensed such that the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 volume of ink expands and film 160 is damaged or deformed by the bo cartridge 14 is placed If film 160 is damaged, the ink leaks, and if film volume inside ink reservoir chamber 111 changes, making it impossible to Therefore, in order to prevent the damage and deformation of film 160, ink i the degree that the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 becomes full
In this embodiment, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber dispensed is lower than the ambient pressure Therefore, a subsequent deco in which the pressure is reduced by aspirating the ambient air inside ink 111 from dispensing passage forming part 450 is sometimes performed Th order to reduce the amount of ambient air inside ink reservoir chamber 11 degree of deaeration of the ink and to reduce the generation of air bubbles deaeration of the ink is for the purpose of maintaining the viscosity of th constant level, and this is because, regarding the generation of air bubbl when air bubbles are supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), the to discharge the ink is not transmitted to the discharge opening (not illustra so the ink cannot be correctly discharged communicating hole 454 is placed above (upper side m Figure 17(a)) liqu ink (or first dispensing communicating hole 452), there is an amount of liquid surface I of the ink and second dispensing communicating hole 454, of ink reservoir chamber 111 is decompressed, so it is possible to substa escape of the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside through d forming part 450
Here, the structure in the vicinity of detection part 140 will be describe Figure 18 Figure 18 is a diagram that shows the vicinity of detection part 1 a diagram that shows the outline of the vicinity of detection part 140, cross-sectional view of detection part 140 through line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in Figure 18(c) is a cross-sectional diagram of the vicinity of detection part XVIIIC-XVIIIC in Figure 18(a)
As illustrated in Figure 18(a), detection part 140 projects outward fro (right side in Figure 18(a)) Detection part 140 is equipped with enclosur encloses the end of sensor arm 470 (see Figure 19) (shielding arm part 473 it with a pair of wall surfaces and forms a passage through which senso displaced Enclosure part 141 is formed into a roughly box-shaped pass surface, which is formed by bottom wall 141a inside enclosure part 141 (lo 18(a)), a pair of side surfaces, which are formed by both side walls 141b th both sides from bottom wall 141a, an inner side surface, which is formed 141c that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side ceiling surface, which is formed by ceiling wall 14 Id that connects to the side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c and is positione wall 141a Detection part 140 is also equipped with arm supporting p provided such that it projects upward from the bottom surface formed by and supports sensor arm 470 from below, and vertical wall 143, which is below, but sensor arm 470 rotates according to the amount of ink inside ink 111, and it is a member that is used to detect that ink cartridge 14 has accommodating chamber 50 of refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 (see the amount of remaining ink has become low by detecting the position of 473c with remaining ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) provided on m 1 1As described above, detection part 140 is translucent, and light from ligh can be transmitted to light receiving part 57b Therefore, when sensor arm part 473 c) is positioned in the light path between light emitting part 57a a part 57b, it blocks the light to be received by light receiving part 57b, so it properties As a result, by rotating in accordance with the amount of ink i chamber 111 (reservoir space), sensor arm 470 can change the amount of light receiving part 57b and detect the presence or absence of remaimng in the positions of light emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b of remai sensor 57 when ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accommodating multifunction device 1 are illustrated, but, as illustrated in the figure, light and light receiving part 57b are positioned in the vicinity of detection part 1
As illustrated in Figure 18(b), the thickness of arm supporting part 142 i second gap t4 between the inside walls of enclosure part 141 (pair of wa surfaces of both side walls 141b) and the outside wall of arm supporting pa than first gap t3 between the inside walls of enclosure 141 (pair of wal surfaces of both side walls 141b) and the outside of sensor arm 470 He inside detection part 140 is reduced, and when liquid surface I of the ink this reduction of ink and liquid surface I of the ink falls below detection inside detection part 140 is depleted, but because first gap t3 between se enclosure 141 is minute, ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the the ink, and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due to this sensor arm 470 and enclosure part 141 As a result, the ink that remains ins 141 is drawn between arm supporting part 142 and enclosure part 141, s substantially prevent ink from remaining between sensor arm 470 and encl to suppress the inhibition of the behavior of sensor arm 470 Sensor a behaves normally, so the amount of remaining ink can be accurately detecte
1 As illustrated in Figure 18(a), bottom wall 141a on the lower part of e (lower side in Figure 18(a)) slopes downward in the direction of ink reservoi the bottom surface formed by bottom wall 141a inside enclosure 141 also Therefore, ink that is drawn between enclosure part 141 and arm supporti downward in the direction of ink reservoir chamber 111 (or supply path f Further, as illustrated in the cross-sectional view in Figure 18(b), the junct bottom wall 141a of enclosure 141 and arm supporting part 142 is formed cross-sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), so the capillary force of of enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 becomes strong, and this is conducive to guiding ink to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (or su part 420) In other words, the junction part of enclosure part 141 and arm s forms a fluid guiding path (guide) for guiding the ink As a result, it is pos make the ink remaining inside enclosure part 141 flow downward
As illustrated in Figure 18 (a), vertical wall 143 that connects to arm sup formed on sloping surface 143 a, which slopes downward in the directio forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Sloping surface 143a const the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer circumference welded part 4 illustrated in the cross-sectional view in Figure 18(c), the junction part of and the inside wall of frame part 110 is formed angularly from a cross-sec (roughly a right angle), and it is formed such that its thickness is roughly eq arm supporting part 141 Therefore, vertical wall 143 slopes downward i arm supporting part 142. As a result, there is no resistance against the guidi path forming part 420, and ink can therefore by efficiently guided
In the case in which sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, sensor arm 470 the ceiling surface formed by ceiling wall 141b, which opposes bottom wall part 140, and the rotation of sensor arm 470 is thus restricted It is the prevent sensor arm 470 from jumping out of enclosure part 140, and the arm 470 becomes accurate, so it is possible to accurately detect the amount
Here, sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to Figure 19 Fig that shows sensor arm 470. Figure 19(a) is a diagram that shows the front 470, and Figure 19(b) is a diagram that shows sensor arm 470 from the pe XiXb in Figure 19(a) Sensor arm 470 is a member for detecting the amoun inside ink reservoir chamber 111 Sensor arm 470 is manufactured by inject a resin material (polypropylene, for example), and it has light-blocking pr is formed to be opaque Sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates according to the am ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and a portion is detected by remai sensor 57 (see Figure 5), which detects the amount of remaining ink reservoir chamber 111 Sensor arm 470 is primarily equipped with balance formed from a material with a lower specific gravity than that of the ink, att which is attached to frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 4 from this attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to (upward in Figure 19(a)), further extends sloping upward, and blocks the detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 Attachment part 472 is connects balance part 471 and arm part 473 Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a, which is attached to arm san
(see Figure 14) of frame part 110, is formed on attachment part 472 Thi which slopes upward from this vertical arm part 473 a, and shielding arm p used as a light-blocking part that blocks the range of possible detection detection sensor 57
As illustrated in Figure 19(b), arm part 473 is formed such that it is su than balance part 471 and attachment part 472 This is because, when arm with a thick profile, the scale of detection part 140 is increased, and as a r 14 becomes large and the resistance when sensor arm 470 rotates increases, makes it impossible to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink. Fur above, when the thickness of detection part 140 increases, the range of dete ink detection sensor 57 widens accordingly and the detection sensitivity expensive, high-performance remaining ink detection sensor with fa properties becomes necessary Therefore, arm part 473 is formed with a thm prevent increases in the scale of ink cartridge 14 and to detect the ac remaining ink Ribs 473d are formed on vertical arm part 473a and sloping a the strength is maintained by these ribs
Roughly semispherical arm protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2 are for arm part 473c in two locations on the top and bottom of the part housed in 140 (upper side end and lower side end in Figure 19(a)), and these arm protr and 473 e2 reduce the likelihood of shielding arm part 473 c adhering to detection part 140 due to the surface tension of the ink and becoming unable words, because arm protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2 are formed into sem the only part that makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2, so the effects of the surface tension of the
Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravity that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step with decreases remaining ink, balance part 471 moves in the direction of the bottom part With a conventional balance part, the inside of the balance part was ho make the balance part float on liquid surface I of the ink, but with this working (or molding) of the balance part becomes difficult In contra embodiment, the materials of sensor arm 470 consist of materials with spe are less than that of the ink, so a working process is not required, and it i manufacture complex dies, so the manufacturing cost of sensor arm 470 can
Next, the positional relationships and shapes of ink supply part 120, part 130, and detection part 140 will be described with reference to Figure diagram that shows a portion of ink reservoir element 100 Figure 20(a) shows the side surface of ink reservoir element 100, Figure 20(b) is a dia partial front view of ink reservoir element 100, and Figure 20(c) is a cr through line XXc-XXc in Figure 20(a)
As illustrated in Figures 20(a) and 20(b), ink supply part 120, ambient and detection part 140 are provided on one of the side surfaces of frame surface, the side surface in the front direction of installation when in installed) As described above, the position illustrated in Figures 20(a) position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed inside accommodating chamb 13 (see Figure 1) Therefore, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installe 13, ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, and ink supply part 12 aligned from top (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom of Figure 20(a)) I elements are aligned in the height direction (Y-direction) of ink cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figure 20(a), width t5 of detection part 140 is form shorter than diameter t6 of the opening of ink supply part 120 (opening 6 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustrated in Figure 20 140 is formed such that it is concave in the direction of frame part 1 withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111) with respect to ink su detection part 140 (both left and right sides in Figure 20(a)), so both side su part 140 (surfaces on the left and right sides in Figure 20(a), front and ba Figure 20(b)) form detection surfaces 140a and 140b As is clear from F detection surfaces 140a and 140b are parallel to the height direction ( cartridge 14 when in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in other words, the surfaces are vertical When ink adheres to the front detection surfaces 140a and 140b, it is sometimes impossible to detect the a remaining ink
For example, at the time of the transportation of multifunction d necessarily transported such that multifunction device 1 is horizontal The part 120 is sometimes positioned on top, but ink sometimes leaks out fro 120 at this time and adheres to detection pat 140 Moreover, when in temporarily removed from refill unit 13, ink that adheres to needle 49 of m 1 is likely to adhere to the vicinity of the opening of ink supply part 1 removed, the ink that adheres to the vicinity of the opening of ink supply p adheres to detection part 140 depending on the position in which the cartridge 14 When ink cartridge 14 is once again installed in refill unit which ink has adhered to detection part 140, because ink detection pa surfaces 140a and 140b) and light receiving part 57b and light emitting part ink detection sensor 57 are in close proximity in the installed state, as desc is a risk that the ink that has adhered to detection part 140 will transfer to li 57b and light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 In adheres to remaining ink detection sensor 57 blocks light and therefor sensitivity of remaining ink detection sensor 57 This deterioration of sensit prominent in black cartridges that use pigmented ink
In this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 20(b), detection part 140 susceptible to the effects of gravity and likely to drop, but because det withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect to ink su ink that drops does not head towards detection part 140, so it does not adher 140 Because detection surfaces 140a and 140b are vertical when in the pos cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13, the ink is most susceptible to the when ink cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13 while the ink is ad surfaces 140a and 140b, so it drops quickly It is therefore possible to subs transfer of ink to light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a detection sensor 57 Furthermore, the ink that drops does not adhere to the supply part 120
Further, as illustrated in Figure 20(c), side walls that form detection wa from the side surface of frame part 110 are formed on detection part 140 T 140c where the side surface of frame part 110 and detection surfaces 140a is formed at a roughly perpendicular angle When ink adheres to the vicinity capillary force of edge 140c acts upon the ink because edge 140c is for perpendicular angle, and the ink is likely to flow to the side of ink supply edge 140c It is therefore possible to reduce the adherence of ink to detect and 140b Next, the configuration of the parts of ink reservoir element 100 will reference to Figure 21 Figure 21 is an exploded front view of ink reservoir
As illustrated in Figure 21, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily brok elements The four parts are frame part 110, ink supply mechanism 500, wh supply part 120, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which constitutes ambi 130, and ink dispensing plug 520, which is pressed into dispensing cylind dispensing part 150 (see Figure 17) Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of is inserted, are formed as a unit on frame part 110 Further, protruding pa (protruding part 116b is not illustrated in the figure), which protrude in t outer circumference of ink supply element 116 in order to fasten ink suppl are symmetrically arranged on ink supply element 116 centered on the a supply element 115 (arranged on the front and back sides in directions pe page in Figure 21) Likewise, protruding parts 117a and 117b (protrudin illustrated in the figure), which protrude in the direction of the outer circum air intake element 117 in order to fasten ambient intake mechanism 510, arranged on ambient air intake element 117 centered on the axial center of element 117 (arranged on the front and back sides in directions perpendic Figure 21) Protruding parts 116a, 116b, 117a, and 117b are formed such t on the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 protrudes in a direction that is pe outer circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 or the outer circum ambient air intake element 117 (Z-direction), and they slope from this pr towards the outer circumferential surface of ink supply element 1 circumference part of ambient air intake element 117 In other words, mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 are attached to ink s and ambient air intake element 117, the easy desorption of ink supply m ambient air intake mechanism 510 can be prevented Next, the components of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air
510 will be described with reference to Figures 22 through 33 Figure 22 is of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 exploded view of ink supply mechanism 500, and Figure 22(b) is an ambient air intake mechanism 510 As illustrated in Figure 22(a), ink supply mechanism 500 is equipped wi which is installed on ink supply element 116, supply joint 610, which is of arrow Ol in Figure 22(a), hereafter called the "axial direction Ol of ink s 500", regarding this direction, as is clear from Figure 14, ink supply mecha parallel to the X-direction when ink cartridge 14 is loaded), second supply s is housed inside this supply slider 640 and is formed with the same material shape as those of first supply spring 630, valve seat 660, which makes second supply slider 650 and receives check valve 670, and cover 680, w valve 670 between the valve and this valve seat 660 Supply valve 620, first supply slider 640, and second supply spring 650 constitute supply valve me actually operates As illustrated in Figure 22(b), ambient air intake mechanism 510 is equip air cap 700, which is installed on ambient air intake element 117, ambient ai is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber, ambient air valve 720, flow path of ink when this ambient air joint 710 and the bottom wall make c contact with back side 56 of multifunction device 1 (see Figure 5) and op (passage) of ambient air when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunctio unit 13, see Figure 1), first ambient air spring 730, which is housed msid valve 720 and is made of a resinous elastic material, ambient air slider 740, open surface of ambient air valve 720 and can be operated in a uniaxial direc movement direction of ambient air valve 720 that is pressed (direction of ar 22(b), hereafter called the "axial direction 02 of ambient air supply mech clear from Figure 14, ambient air supply 510 becomes parallel to the X-di cartridge 14 is loaded), and second ambient air spring 750, which is h ambient air slider 740 and is formed with the same material and into the sa of first ambient air spring 730 Ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spr air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 constitute ambient air valv side view of supply cap 600, Figure 23 (b) is a diagram that shows a side vi 600 from the perspective of arrow XXIIIb in Figure 23 (a), Figure 23 (c) shows a plan view of supply cap 600, Figure 23 (d) is a diagram that shows supply cap 600, and Figure 23 (e) is a cross-sectional view of supply cap XXIIIe-XXIIIe in Figure 23(c)
As illustrated in Figure 23 (a), supply cap 600 is formed with a two-step view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in the upper side part in Figure 23 (a) is supply securing part 601, which is fas circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and is formed into a ro shape, while the lower side part in Figure 23(b) is ink storage part 602, storage space for preventing ink from dripping to the outside of ink cartridge
Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23 (b) for engagement hole formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to the part in the v (vicinity of the upper side end in Figure 23 (a)) and engage with protrudi 116b (see Figure 21) of ink supply element 116 when supply cap 600 is sec element 116 (see Figure 21), are formed on supply securing part 601
As illustrated in Figure 23 (b), a pair of supply cap cutout parts 604a and 23 (c) for supply cap cutout part 604b), which are formed in a straight li orthogonal to the straight line that connects engagement holes 603a an moved approximately 90° with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply me are cut out facing the direction of ink storage part 602 from the top surface o part 601 (upper end surface in Figure 23 (b)), are formed on supply securing
As illustrated in the front view in Figure 23 (c) and in the bottom vie insertion hole 605, into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inserted (des formed in roughly the center position of ink storage part 602 of supply cap 6 the outer side that forms lower wall 606c to the circle one step outward is s 606d, which forms the lower end surface of supply securing part 601 and fo surface of ink storage part 602 The part that connects lower wall 606c and 606d is outer circumferential wall 606e, which forms the outer circumferen storage part 602 Sloping wall 606b forms the cylindrical part inside ink sto outer circumferential wall 606e, which is connected to this sloping wall 60 606c, forms the cylindrical part of the outside that encloses sloping wall 606 of the inside)
In Figure 23(d), sloping wall 606b slopes downward, so the insertion ope is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross-sectional view in that it decreases in diameter towards insertion hole 605 with a maximum d opening 600a, which forms the final exit of the ink As a result, the inn surface on the side of axial center Ol of sloping wall 606b becomes the i which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inserted The space of range t7 illustrate and 23 (c) (in other words, the space formed by sloping wall 606b, lower wa circumferential wall 606e) forms ink storing part 607, in which in (accumulated)
When supply cap 600 is attached to ink supply element 116 (see Figur parts 116a and 116b of ink supply element 116 protrude in the outer circumf so supply cap 600 is attached as it increases in diameter in the outer circumf Because supply cap cutout parts 604a and 604b are formed, the diameter o increases in the direction in which engagement parts 603 a and 603b mov another Therefore, when supply cap 600 is to be attached, it can be attached strong pressure, so it is possible to improve the installation efficiency while to supply cap 600 611, which is the part that makes contact with second upper wall 606d of in of supply cap 600 (see Figure 23) and the inner circumferential surface o part 601 and forms the outer circumference part of supply joint 610 circumference part 611 is the part that is sandwiched between second up supply cap 600 and the outside end surface of ink supply element 116 wh which supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 The part illustra of joint outer circumference part 611 is joint inner circumference part 612, into and arranged inside ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21) and circumference part of supply joint 610, and the upper portion of joint inner c 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a) Further, the part illustrated at the top st circumference part 612 is joint contact part 613, which makes contact with (see Figure 25) Supply joint 610 is made of an elastic material such as a resi
As illustrated in Figure 24(b), the axial center of supply joint 610 is po center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, and joint contact part 613, joint in part 612, and joint outer circumference part are sequentially formed t circumferential direction from this axial center Ol
As illustrated in Figure 24(d), joint contact part 613 projects from top joint inner circumference part 612 (surface on the side that makes contact 620) Joint contact part 613 is formed such that it narrows toward tip 613a ( Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes contact with the bottom surface of and blocks the flow path of the ink Further, joint protruding part 614, whic the inner circumferential surface toward axial center 01, opening 612c, insertion opening of needle 49 (see Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 61 circumference part 612 (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped inserti which is formed between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614, are surface 612b of joint inner circumference part 612 to tip 613a of joint cont the upper side to the lower side in Figure 24(d)), is formed on supply joint 6 path 615 consists of opening 612c, which is formed on bottom surface 61 path 615a, which is demarcated by stepped insertion passage 612d connecte protruding part flow path 615b, which is demarcated by inner circumferenti joint protruding part 614 connected to insertion passage 612d, and contact p which is demarcated by stepped surface 614b connected to inner circumfere of joint protruding part 614 and inner circumferential surface 613b of joint connected to this stepped surface 614b The lower half of step part flow path 615a is formed in a stepped shape i axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path 615a is formed i towards protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, step part flow path 61 stepped shape such that the diameter gradually decreases from opening contact surface with inner circumferential surface 614a of joint protrudi lower part of step part flow path 615a is formed in a stepped shape, so even Figure 2) is removed and a minute quantity of ink flows through ink flow p held by the capillary force due to the angular part of this step part, so it is p ink from dripping to the outside of supply joint 610 When needle 49 is rem of ink can be likewise prevented, even if ink drips into ink flow path 61 needle 49 In this embodiment, supply cap 600 is equipped with ink storag portion of the lower half of step part flow path 615a that is formed in a st alternatively be formed in a tapered shape
Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smallest diamete 615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape The inside protruding part flow path 615b is formed such that it is slightly smaller tha countersunk shape by its inner circumferential surface 613b and stepped sur 613a of joint contact part 613 is positioned in the periphery of this cutout par
Needle 49, which is inserted from opening 612c, is guided to the upper p flow path 615a that is formed in a tapered shape and is inserted into protrudi 615b At this time, because the inside diameter of protruding part flow pat smaller than the diameter of needle 49, needle 49 elastically adheres to inn surface 614a of joint protruding part 614 that forms protruding part flow pressed inside such that it spreads protruding part flow path 615b. In o protruding part 614 acts to seal the periphery of needle 49 that is pressed in flow path 615b Moreover, if the area of the part of supply joint 610 that elas the periphery of needle 49 becomes large, the resistance when ink cartridge multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1) becomes large, and smooth installati impossible However, in this embodiment, a configuration that establishes part 614 and makes contact with needle 49 only on the inner circumferential used, so it is possible to reduce the surface of contact with needle 49 and t the cartridge in multifunction device 1 Moreover, needle 49 is inserted into i so the flow path through which ink actually flows becomes the inside of n because contact part flow path 615c is formed into a countersunk shape, th supply joint 610 in the direction of axial center Ol when needle 49 is inserte Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620 Figure 25(a) is a di a side view of supply valve 620, Figure 25 (b) is a diagram that shows a sid valve 620 from the perspective of arrow XXVb in Figure 25(a), Figure 25(c) shows a plan view of supply valve 620, Figure 25(d) is a diagram that shows supply valve 620, and Figure 25(e) is a cross-sectional view of supply valve XXVe-XXVe in Figure 25(c) formed with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 More in Figure 25 (c), valve projecting wall 624, which projects in the opposite bottom wall 621 from the top of valve outer circumferential wall 622 in the center 01, is formed on valve outer circumferential wall 622, and valve guid formed across the vicinity of the bottom of valve outer circumferential wall of this valve projecting wall 624 As a result, because the distance of valve g is secured as a long distance, the deviation of slider loose insertion part 643 grooves 623 can be prevented
Moreover, a pair of valve constraimng parts 625, which project in the op valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of supply slider 640, is c outer circumferential wall 622 Each of the valve constraining parts 625 valve hook part 626, which projects towards axial center Ol from its tip (tip portion in Figure 25(a)) and engages with supply slider 640
Further, four valve protruding parts 622a, which protrude in semicircu outer circumferential direction and are formed from the top to the botto circumferential wall 622, are formed on valve outer circumferential wal spacing along valve outer circumferential wall 622. These valve protrudi provided in order to smoothly perform the operations of supply valve 620 w 620 is inserted into ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21) When th protruding parts 622a, the inner circumferential surface of ink supply eleme outer circumferential surface 622 sometimes make contact, so the contact supply element 116 becomes large, and the resistance at the time of operat large Therefore, because valve protruding parts 622a formed in semicir provided, only valve protruding parts 622a make contact with the inne surface of ink supply element 116, and the operations of supply valve 620 direction of valve bottom wall 621 (direction perpendicular to the page in formed on valve bottom wall 621 in positions corresponding to valve guid constraining part 625 in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply (direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 25 (c)) Valve bottom wall 62 from its bottom surface and is equipped with valve bearing part 628, which receives spring top part 632 of first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) Valv is made of two plate-shaped members arranged in parallel on valve bott illustrated in Figure 25(e), the height of valve bearing part 628 in the directi Ol is formed such that it is substantially lower than valve outer circumf Valve bearing part 628 is provided in order to ensure that first supply sp make contact with valve bottom wall 621 when first supply spring 630 i space inside valve outer circumferential wall 622 This is because, if first s makes contact with valve bottom wall 621, the ink flow path is blocked a flows. Therefore, valve bearing part 628 is provided in order to secure the i the part is acceptable as long as first supply spring 630 does not make c bottom wall 621, so it is formed to the minimum required height, and this p in the scale of the size in the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mech
Valve inner circumferential wall 629, which is formed in a roughly circul the outer circumferential surface of spring top part 632 of first supply spring on the outside of valve bearing part 62$ and on the inside of ink flow pat inner circumferential wall 629 is provided in order to restrict the moveme spring 630 in a direction that is orthogonal to axial center 01, and first sup accurately bent in the direction of axial center Ol by restricting the movem spring 630 in a direction that is orthogonal to axial center Ol Figure 26 is a diagram that shows first supply spπng 630 Figure 26(a) ring-shaped spring top part 632, which is formed with a diameter that is diameter of this spring bottom part 631 and forms the top part of the upp supply spring 630 (end of the side with the smaller diameter), and spring which is connected between this spring top part 632 and spring bottom pa and deforms when a load is applied in the direction of axial center mechanism 500 (the movement direction of supply valve 620 that is press (see Figure 2); also the biased direction of first supply spring 630 and seco 650) Spring top part 632 makes contact with valve bearing part 628 of (see Figure 25) and forms a pressing part that presses supply valve 620 i supply joint 610 (see Figure 24) The diameter of spnng bottom part 631 is f is larger than the diameter of spnng top part 632, so spring bottom part 63 when spring plastic part 633 is elastically deformed
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), ink flow path 634, which communicate spring top part 632 (right end surface in Figure 26(d)) to the bottom surface part 631 (left end surface in Figure 26(d)), is formed on first supply spring 6 path 634 consists of top part flow path 634a, which is demarcated by the inn surface of spring top part 632, plastic part flow path 634b, which is demarc circumferential surface of spring plastic part 633, and bottom part flow pat demarcated by the inner circumferential surface of spnng bottom part 631 Figure 26(d), the area of the opening of this ink flow path 634 gradually incr of spnng top part 632 towards the bottom surface of spring bottom part 6 illustrated in Figures 26(b) and 26(c), top part flow path 634a of spring top p in a circular shape from the perspective of the direction perpendicular to spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed into a roughly reversed bowl sh on the side moving away from axial center 01, spring plastic part 633 ca device 1 (see Figure 1) normally As a result, the quality of printing by multi decreases However, when the opening of top part flow path 634a i quadrilateral shape, the four corners are not blocked even if air bubbles that the opening surface of top part flow path 634a accumulate, so it is p decreases in printing quality by preventing the ink flow path from being blo opening surface of top part flow path 634a is not limited to a quadrila alternatively be formed into a polygon such as a hexahedron or a star embodiment, even if it is circular, it may be formed with a diameter with w air bubbles would be minimal As illustrated in Figure 26(d), spring top part 632 is formed into cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center 01, and it is for cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center Ol (bi first supply spring 630) is uniform Similarly, spring bottom part 631 is al relatively thick cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial ce formed such that the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the direction of uniform
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), spring plastic part 633 is formed into a bowl shape (or roughly conical shape) that curves (or slopes) at a prescr direction of axial center Ol As a result, the strength with respect to loading i axial center Ol become weak in comparison to spnng bottom part 631 and s Furthermore, spring plastic part 633 is formed such that it has a thinner p bottom part 631 and spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength. A first supply spnng 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically defo
Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that of first s and the composition of second supply spnng 650 consists of spring botto Figure 27 is a diagram that shows supply slider 640 Figure 27(a) is a di a side view of supply slider 640, Figure 27(b) is a diagram that shows a si slider 640 from the perspective of arrow XXVIIb in Figure 27(a), Figure 2 that shows a plan view of supply slider 640, Figure 27(d) is a diagram tha view of supply slider 640, and Figure 27(e) is a cross-sectional view of through line XXVIIe-XXVIIe in Figure 27(c)
Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a higher degree first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) and second supply spring 650, a equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 641, which forms the o supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting walls 642a and 642b, which slider outer circumferential wall 641 in the direction of axial center O mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose insertion parts 643, which extend circumferential wall 641 to the upper tip of slider projecting wall 642a ( Figure 27(a)) and are loosely inserted into valve guide grooves 623 of supp Figure 25), slider platform part 644, either side on which first and second s and 650 are arranged, which is formed on the inside of slider outer circum and makes contact with spring bottom parts 631 and 651 of first and secon 650, and slider through-hole 645, which is formed in the center position part 644 and connects the top and bottom of slider platform part 644 As is 27(c), slider projecting walls 642a and 642b are positioned [symmetricall sandwich axial center 01, and the pair of slider loose insertion parts 643 i [symmetrically] such that they sandwich axial center 01.
The inside diameter of slider outer circumferential wall 641 is forme roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spπng lower parts 631 and 651 o supply springs 630 and 650, and slider projecting walls 642a and 642b are protruding part 642), so when they are loosely inserted into valve guide Figure 25), they are moved smoothly in the direction of axial center Ol of and misalignment in the direction orthogonal to the direction of axial prevented. Figure 28 is a diagram that shows valve seat 660 Figure 28(a) is a dia side view of valve seat 660, Figure 28(b) is a diagram that shows a plan 660, Figure 28(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of valve seat 660, a a cross-sectional view of valve seat 660 through line XXVIIId-XXVIIId in F
As illustrated in Figure 28(a), valve seat 660 is equipped with valve sea which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and makes contact w 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat bearing parts 662, which top surface of this valve seat bottom part 661 (upper side in Figure 28(a)) bearing part 662 is equipped with valve seat sloping surface 662a, which sl it approaches the center of valve seat 660, and check valve 670, which below, is received by this valve seat sloping surface 662a
As illustrated in Figure 28(b), six valve seat bearing parts 662 are forme spacing in the circumferential direction of valve seat 660 First valve seat th which pass through the front and back of valve seat 660, are formed on thre seat bearing parts These first valve seat through-holes 662b are formed o than valve seat sloping surface 662a of valve seat bearing part 662 (hori valve seat bearing part 662) Therefore, because first valve seat throug formed on a portion that differs from the portion that receives check valve of the ink flow path can be prevented
Moreover, second valve seat through-holes 663, which pass through part 661, are formed between valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve seat valve seat through-holes 663 to one another in a roughly linear manner on t of valve seat bottom part 661 Therefore, three valve seat communicating gr intersect at axial center 01, are formed Moreover, a pair of valve projecting project from this bottom surface, is formed on the bottom surface of valve 661 Spring top part 652 of second supply spring is housed in each of projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumferential top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of second supply direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
As illustrated in Figure 28(d), a gap is formed between valve seat slopin valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat through-holes 663 in the center Ol As a result, even if check valve 670 is supported on valve seat slo the flow path of the ink is secured Moreover, even if the end surface of spri second supply spring 650 makes contact with the bottom surfaces of s through-holes 663, second valve seat through-holes 663 are positioned to t virtual circumference of valve seat projecting part 664 (virtual line R in Fig flow path of the ink is secured by valve seat communicating grooves communicating grooves 664 connect all of the second valve seat through-hol there are second valve seat through-holes 663 that are enclosed by valve se 665, the ink flow path can be reliably secured. Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670 Figure 29(a) is a diag side view of check valve 670, Figure 29(b) is a diagram that shows a plan vi
670, Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of check valve 670, is a cross-sectional view of check valve 670 through line XXIXd-XXIXd in
Check valve 670 is roughly formed into an umbrella shape from a side (perspective in the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 29(a)), 680 and check valve 670
As illustrated in Figure 29(a), the bottom surface of umbrella part 67 curved shape and is supported by valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve sea
28), so the flow path of the ink is opened in the state in which umbrella part by valve seat bearings 662 of valve seat 660, while the flow path of the ink state in which umbrella part 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cove
Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover through-hole 68 of cover 680, which will be described below This shaft part 672 is position of cover 680 in the state in which it is attached to cover 680, and it has ball is formed into a roughly spherical shape. This ball part 672a is formed with greater than that of second cover through-hole 684 of cover 680, and it pre 670 from falling off once it is attached to cover 680 As a result, it is possi loss of check valve 670 when manufacturing ink cartridge 14, and operationa
Figure 30 is a diagram that shows cover 680 Figure 30(a) is a diagram view of cover 680, Figure 30(b) is a diagram that shows a plan view of c 30(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of cover 680, and Fi cross-sectional view of cover 680 through line XXXd-XXXd in Figure 30(b)
Cover 680 is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape in which the bo
(side of valve seat 660 (see Figure 28)) is opened Cover 680 is equipped circumferential wall 681, which forms the outer periphery, and cover top forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Figure 30(a)), and it is for bottom surface side is opened Valve seat 660 is fitted into the opemng of t of cover 680 (lower side in Figure 30(a)), and check valve 670 is housed b
660 and cover 680 In other words, the space that houses check valve 670 is 680 and valve seat 660 - inserted, is formed in the center of cover top part 682 (position passing thr Ol of ink supply mechanism 500) Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is second cover through-hole 684, and check valve 670 is thereby attached E which check valve 670 is inserted into second cover through-hole 684, the ink is formed on a portion of this inner circumferential surface However, w 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cover top part 682, the through-hole is blocked, so the ink flow path of second cover through-hole center is simultaneously blocked
Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700 Figure 31 (a) shows a side view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 31(b) is a diagram that sho ambient air cap 700 from the perspective of arrow XXXIb in Figure 31 (a), diagram that shows a plan view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 31(d) is a dia bottom view of ambient air cap 700, and Figure 31(e) is a cross-sectional vi cap 700 through line XXXIe-XXXIe in Figure 31(c) As illustrated in Figure 31 (a), ambient air cap 700 is equipped with ro ambient air securing part 701, which forms the side wall of this ambient a fastened to ambient air intake element 117 (see Figure 21), and ambient air 702, which forms the bottom wall of ambient air cap 700 Engagement hol (see Figure 31(b) for engagement hole 703b), which are formed from th ambient air securing part 701 (lower side in Figure 31 (a)) to the vicinit (vicinity of the end of the upper side in Figure 31 (a)) and are engaged wit 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 described above when ambi fastened to ambient air intake element 117, are formed on ambient air securi
As illustrated in Figure 3 l(b), ambient air cap cutout parts 704a and 704 cutout part 704b is not illustrated in the figure), which are formed in ° air cap bottom wall 702 Ambient air joint 710 (see Figure 32) is housed s contact with the inside surface of ambient air cap bottom wall 70 circumferential surface of ambient air securing part 701.
When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake element 117 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 protrude in the oute direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient air cap 700 is attached diameter in the outer circumferential direction. Therefore, when ambient ai attached, it can be attached without applying strong pressure, so it is possib installation efficiency while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700 Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710 Figure 32(a) shows a side view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(b) is a diagram that s of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom vi joint 710, and Figure 32(d) is a cross-sectional view of ambient air joint XXXIId-XXXIId in Figure 32(b) As illustrated in Figure 32(a), ambient air joint 710 is formed in four view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in F part illustrated in the second step from the bottom (lower side in Figure 32 circumference part 711, which is the part that makes contact with the inn surface of ambient air securing part 701 (see Figure 31) of ambient air cap air cap bottom wall 702 and forms the outer circumference part of ambient part illustrated at the top step of this joint outer circumference part 7 circumference part 712, which is provided on the inside of ambient air in (see Figure 21) and forms the inner circumference part of ambient air joint part of joint inner circumference part 712 is illustrated in Figure 32(a) illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 712 is contact 510 Moreover, ambient air joint 710 is made of an elastic material such as when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), jo which is formed with a thin profile, makes contact with the end surface device 1 and is elastically deformed As illustrated in Figure 32(d), joint contact part 713 projects from to joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that makes contact valve 720) Joint contact part 713 is formed such that it narrows toward tip part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a makes contact with the bottom surfa valve 720 and blocks the ambient air intake path Moreover, as illustrated joint passage 715, which passes from the bottom surface of joint inner circu to tip 713a of joint contact part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32( ambient air joint 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720 is joint passage 715
Figure 33 is a diagram that shows ambient air valve 720 Figure 33 (a) shows a side view of ambient air valve 720, and Figure 33(b) is a diagr bottom view of ambient air valve 720 Ambient air valve 720 has a confi valve open part 721a, which projects from the bottom surface of valve bott opens the ambient air intake path by making contact with the side of multi (see Figure 1), is added to supply valve 620 Therefore, detailed description wall 721, valve outer circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part 7 groove 723, valve projecting wall 724, valve constraimng part 725, valv ambient air intake path 727 (part corresponding to ink flow path 627), valve and valve inner circumferential wall 729 will be omitted here. Illustrations o be visually confirmed in the side view (Figure 33 (a)) and bottom view ( ambient air valve 720 will also be omitted here is exposed to the outside of ambient air cap 700 (see Figure 31) When i installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), valve open part 721a m the end surface of multifunction device 1, and the contact with joint con 713a) of ambient air joint 710 is broken, thus forming an ambient air intake When ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 and valv operates, joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also makes contact wi of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, and this blocks communic ambient air intake path and the outside of joint skirt part 714. As a result, introduced from the side of multifunction device 1 can be introduced sm even if joint skirt part 714 elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and m valve open part 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex open part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservoir chambe 14) Next, the state in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intak are installed into ink supply element 116 and ambient air intake element 117 with reference to Figure 34 Figure 34 is a partial cross-sectional view that which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 are supply element 116 and ambient air intake element 117. As illustrated in Figure 34, ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted int inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116, and a mechanism 510 is inserted into and attached to inner circumferential surfac air intake element 117
First, ink supply mechanism 500, which is attached to ink supply ele described. On inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 11 680, and valve seat 660 is arranged such that it houses this check valve 670 Second supply spring 650 is arranged on the bottom surface side of this v side in Figure 34), and supply slider 640 is arranged such that it houses t spring 650 First supply spring 630 is housed by supply slider 640 on the second supply spring 650, and first supply spring 630 is arranged between and supply valve 620 Moreover, supply joint 610 is arranged such that it m the bottom surface of supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to supply element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of thi Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 116a and 11 element 116, so the position on the outside of ink supply mechanism 5 Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply determined by supply cap 600 and stepped surface 801a of inner circumfer of ink supply element 116
The inside diameter of inner circumferential surface 800 of ink suppl formed such that it is slightly larger than the outside diameter of supply va configured such that the operation of supply valve 620 in the direction of ax be performed smoothly inside ink supply element 116 As descnbed a protruding parts 622a are formed on the outer circumferential surface of s and it is configured such that the contact surface with inner circumferenti small Therefore, even if supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal directio axial center Ol and makes contact with inner circumferential surface 800, prevent the state in which supply valve 620 cannot be operated Moreover, between supply valve 620 and inner circumferential surface 800, so an i passes through the inside of ink supply mechanism 500 and an ink flo through the outside of supply valve 620 are formed As a result, inner circu spring 630 in the direction of axial center 01, so first supply spring 630 is deformed in the position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
Next, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which is attached to ambient 117, will be described On inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air i protruding part 811, which protrudes in the direction of ambient air intak (left direction in Figure 34), is formed on the end surface of ambient a forming part 430 on the side of first ambient air communicating chamber Th 811 is configured as a pair of plate-shaped member, and it makes contact wit of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750 As a result, an ambi is formed between protruding part 811 and spring top part 752 of second a 750 Moreover, the position of ambient air intake mechanism 510 on the sid air communicating hole 434 is determined as a result of second ambie making contact with protruding part 811
As with the ink supply mechanism 500 side, ambient air slider 740 is arr air intake mechanism 510 such that it houses second ambient air spring 750, air spnng 730 is housed by ambient air slider 740 on the opposite side of se spring 750, while first ambient air spnng 730 is arranged between ambient ambient air valve 720 Moreover, ambient air joint 710 is arranged such that with the bottom surface of ambient air valve 720, and ambient air cap 700 outside of ambient air intake element 17 such that it makes contact with the the outer circumferential side from joint skirt part 714 of this ambient air jo air cap 700 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 117a and 117b of element 117, so the position on the outside of ambient air intake m determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center 02 of a mechanism 510 is determined by ambient air cap 700 and protruding p film 160 is welded Figure 36 is a diagram that explains the welding pro Figure 36(a) is a diagram that explains the welding surface of frame part 11 160 is welded, and Figure 36(b) is a diagram that explains the welding proc 160 is welded to frame part 110 Figure 37 is a diagram that explains t process performed after film 160 is welded. Figure 37(a) is a diagram attachment process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air i 510 are attached to frame part 110, Figure 37(b) is a diagram that explains t process, and Figure 37(c) is a diagram that explains the ink dispensing proce diagram that explains the installation process of case 200 Figure 38(a) i explains the process in which case 200 sandwiches frame part 110, and diagram that explains the welding process in which case 200 is welded diagram that explains the manufacturing process performed before ink cartri Figure 39(a) is a diagram that explains the process in which protector 300 Figure 39(b) is a diagram that explains the process in which ink cartridge 1 packaging bag 930
As illustrated in Figure 35, in the manufacture of ink cartridge 14, senso attached to frame part 110 Frame part 110 and sensor arm 470 are ea injection molding in a preliminary process (molding process). In other respectively molded in a first molding process (preparatory process) in whi is injection-molded and in a second molding process (preparatory process) arm 470 is injection-molded
In sensor arm 470, attachment shaft 472a, which is provided on attach sensor arm 470 is attached to arm sandwiching part 425, which is provided supply path forming part 420 of frame part 110 (sensor arm 470 att preparatory process) Arm sandwiching part 425 opens on the opposite side 473 c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141 d of enclosure part 141 of dete other words, once the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, sensor ar easily detached, so it is possible to prevent the manufacturing process of ink becoming complicated and to prevent sensor arm 470 from detaching from when the ink cartridge is transported As a result, when ink cartridge 1 multifunction device 1, the empty ink state can be reliably detected, so the product can be improved
In this embodiment, a supporting part that forms the axis of rotational o arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (attachment shaft 472a) of s supported on arm sandwiching part 425 of frame part 110, but a configur attachment shaft is provided on the side of frame part 110 and a sandwichin on the side of sensor arm 470 may also be used, and a configuration in whic and frame part 110 are attached using a hinge junction would also be acc words, as long as sensor arm 470 is attached such that it can rotate with res 110, its attachment structure may take any form
When the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, ink dispensing pressed inside dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing part 150 (in 520 pressing process, preparatory process) Ink dispensing plug 520 is outside end surface 520a of ink dispensing plug 520 is in roughly the s outside surface of frame part 110, and it is not pressed to a position such that with bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451. This is because, as first dispensing cornmunicating hole 452 of dispensing passage forming part the side surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, and when ink dispensing pl to the back of dispensing cylinder part 451, first dispensing communicating block, making it impossible to dispense ink Moreover, ink dispensing p opening 112b.
As illustrated in Figure 36(b), film 160 is cut such that it is larger than t of frame part 110 and it covers frame part 110. At this time, film 160 is opening 112a and second opening 112b without wrinkles by aspirating aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) from the side of frame part 110. surface 900 of an ultrasonic welding device (not illustrated in the figure) is 160 such that it covers the outer circumference parts of first and second o 112b (outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of f 160 is welded to frame part 110. When film 160 is welded to each weld painted black in Figure 37(a) (outer circumference welded parts 400a an circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b) are welded.
On frame part 110, multiple inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417b are dispersed on the inner circumferential side of outer circumference and 400b, so if ultrasonic welding is performed with respect to all of the structure of ultrasound welded surface 900 becomes complex, and the m therefore increases However, in this embodiment, ultrasound welded su ultrasonic welding device is configured such that it covers all of the w circumference welded parts and inner circumference welded parts), so it is increases in the manufacturing cost of the welding process of film 160 Moreover, film 160 is made of a "double-layered film comprising a polyethylene film (called "nylon polyethylene" hereafter), and the side th with frame part 110 is the polyethylene film layer This nylon polyethylene liquids, but it is relatively gas permeable, so a small amount of gas circu between ink reservoir chamber 111, which is roughly sealed by film 160, a 930 (see Figure 39(b)), which will be described below As a result, gas tha Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is made of substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 Because fil part 110 are formed from the same material, both film 160 and the welded and welded reliably at the time of ultrasonic welding. In this embodimen double-layer structure. Nylon films are superior to polyethylene films from t strength, but their melting point is high, so they are deficient from the persp operationality Therefore, when film 160 is formed with a double-layer s nylon and polyethylene, the strength is secured, and by using the polyeth layer that is welded to frame part 110, welding can be performed at a low he so welding operationality is secured. Furthermore, the nylon layer does welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of the film in welded parts, and the strength of the film in the vicinity of the welded maintained.
As illustrated in Figure 37(a), when the welding of film 160 is com mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 are attached to fra supply mechanism 500 is attached to ink supply element 116 (ink supply attachment process; preparatory process), and ambient air intake mechanis to ambient air intake element 117 (ambient air intake mechanism [500] att preparatory process) In the attachment of ink supply mechanism 500 (attac component in which cover 680, check valve 670, and valve seat 660 are fo inserted inside ink supply element 116 (position that makes contact with 801a) At this time, the tip of check valve 670 is inserted into first supply co 421 (see Figure 34), and it is attached such that it projects into the space en partition wall 422. A component in which supply joint 610, supply valve spπng 630, supply slider 640, and second supply spring 650 are formed as a When the attachment of supply cap 600 to ink supply element 116 is comple of ink supply mechanism 500 is complete, and ink supply part 120 is constru
As with the attachment of ink supply mechanism 500 to ink supply attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 to ambient air int (attachment process) is performed in a process in which a component in joint 710, ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spring 730, ambient ai second ambient air spring 750 are formed as a unit in ambient air cap 700 inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake element 117, and a is fixed to the outer circumferential surface of ambient air intake element ambient air cap 700 is pushed to the side of ambient air intake element 117 holes 703a and 703b of ambient air cap 700 are engaged with protruding pa of ambient air intake element 117 In ambient air joint 710, joint inner circu is pressed inside inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake joint outer circumference part 711 is sandwiched between ambient air intake ambient air cap 700 When the attachment of ambient air cap 700 to a element 117 is complete, the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism and ambient air intake part 130 is completed
As illustrated in Figure 37(b), when the attachment of ink supply me ambient air intake mechanism 510 to supply element 116 and ambient air i (each attachment process) is complete, a decompression process in which t part 110 (ink reservoir chamber 111) is decompressed is performed In this decompression of the inside of frame part 110 is performed from the side 120 In the decompression of the inside of frame part 110, suction tube reducing device 910 is first inserted into supply joint 610 of ink supply m supply valve 620 is pressed by suction tube 911, thus opening the ink fl state is maintained
As illustrated in Figure 37(c), when the decompression inside frame pa after the decompression process, ink dispensing needle 920 is inserted in plug 520, and ink is dispensed into frame part 110 (ink reservoir chamber 11 process). The inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is depressurized, so t dispensed into ink reservoir chamber 111, and when a prescribed amount dispensed, dispensing needle 920 is removed and the ink dispensing proc The air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after ink is dispensed is air pressure) Moreover, "a prescribed amount of ink" refers to the quantity surface I of the ink drops below second ambient air communicating ho ambient air communicating hole 436 of ambient air communicating passage as illustrated in Figure 37(c) Therefore, when ink is dispensed, the penet ambient air connection passage 433 can be avoided The purpose for not dis ink reservoir chamber 111 until no vacant space is left inside ink reservoir as described above, prevent the damage or deformation of film 160 Mor below liquid surface I of the ink illustrated in Figure 37(c) is the ink space and the space above liquid surface I of the ink and the space contai communicating passage forming part 430 is the ambient air com (decompressed space), but the ink space and the ambient air communicatin shape and size depending on the state in which ink cartridge 14 is placed a remaining ink
Ink is dispensed in the state in which the inside of ink reservoir decompressed by pressure reducing device 910, so even after the disp complete, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is in the decom pressure pi) Therefore, there are cases in which a subsequent decompressi that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be descπbed The subseque process is performed using ink dispensing needle 920, which was inserted i plug 520 In other words, a supply device that supplies ink (not illustrated in pressure reducing device that reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambien part 110 (not illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing nee the ink is completely dispensed, the flow path is switched and decompressio reducing device is begun The air pressure p3 (third pressure) inside ink r 111 after subsequent decompression is performed is lower than the air press reservoir chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed Therefore, the quantity reservoir chamber 111 further decreases as a result of the subsequent decom so the generation of air bubbles inside the ink can be prevented, and th printing quality due to air bubbles can be avoided Moreover, the ink that fl of the ink dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside ink reser so air bubbles are more likely to generate, but the air bubbles generated at removed Further, the device may also be configured such that a decompre illustrated in the figure) for performing subsequent decompression is pr from ink dispensing needle 920, and decompression is performed decompression needle after removing ink dispensing needle 920
As illustrated in Figure 17, in dispensing passage forming part 450, the o dispensing communicating hole 454 is positioned above liquid surface I o Figure 17(a)), so even if subsequent decompression is performed with a device, the ink is never aspirated to the outside through the dispensing pat amount of ink that is dispensed never changes due to subsequent decom possible to reliably dispense a prescribed amount of ink Although it is not illustrated in the figures, when the dispensing (or deco to prevent the occurrence of defective products
As illustrated in Figure 38(a), when the dispensing (or decompressi complete, the manufacture of ink reservoir element 110 is complete, so th assembled (case 200 assembly process) Case 200 (first and second case 220) is molded by injection-molding, and it is manufactured in advanc process)
As described above, in the assembly of cover 200, rod members 215a to member 210 are inserted into three through-holes 460a to 460c (se through-holes 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumfere part 100, and ink reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member ink supply part 120 (supply cap 600) and ambient air intake part 130 (ambie respectively engaged with case cutout parts 211 and 212, and the outer wall 120 (outer circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of element 130 (outer circumferential surface of ambient air cap 700) make co grooves 211a and 212a Second case member 220 is then attached such tha parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) of second case member 22 members 215a to 215c of first case member 210. At this time, ink supply pa 600) and ambient air intake part 130 (ambient air cap 700) are respectively e cutout parts 221 and 222 of second case member 220, and the outer wall 120 (outer circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of element 130 (outer circumference of ambient air cap 700) make contact wit 221a and 222a.
As illustrated in Figure 38(b), when the assembly of first and second c (assembly process) is complete, first and second case members 210 and 220 another (case 200 welding process). In the welding process of first and seco peel due to human actions, any welding range or welding method may be use
In this embodiment, first and second case members 210 and 220 are as ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first and second case 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultrasonic welding is abso Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations in which the welded parts of film 160 are damaged or film 160 peels as a result of vibration accompanyi case 200 Moreover, when the welded parts of first and second case member partially welded, the generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding is damage of each part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced. As illustrated in Figure 38(b), case projecting parts 214a and 224a (ca
214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecting parts 214b and 224 part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) project outward from ink sup ambient air intake part 130 Therefore, when ink cartridge 14 is to be i recording device 1, even if ink cartridge 14 is dropped, case projecting parts and 224b make impact with the ground, so the damage of ink supply part 12 intake part 130 can be prevented. Further, the opemng of the ambient air inta supply path can also be prevented, so the leakage of ink can be prevented.
As illustrated in Figure 39(a), when the welding process of case 200 is co 300 is attached to case 200 (protector 300 attachment process) This protecto when ink cartridge 14 is attached to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), s such that it can be freely attached and detached As described above, protru and 330bl of protector 300 engage with through-holes formed by case proje 214a and 224a (see Figure 8) of first and second case members 21 through-holes formed by case projecting cutout parts 214b and 224b of first members 210 and 220, and protector 300 is thus attached to case 200 in the packaging process, all of the other opened portions excluding ultrasonically welded in a state in which ink cartridge 14 is enclosed Su pressure reducing device 940 is inserted through this opening 931, and the of packaging bag 930 is aspirated and reduced by activating suction pump pressure of packaging bag 930 due to this decompression is at a level lower pressure, but it is reduced such that it becomes air pressure p2 (second pr lower than air pressure p3 that is reduced inside ink reservoir chamber 111 ( when a subsequent decompression process is not performed) When d pressure reducing device 940 is complete, suction tube 941 is removed an welded, resulting in a state in which ink cartridge 14 can be shipped. The rel air pressures pi to p3 is the relationship p2 < p3 < pi
Because the air pressure inside packaging bag 930 is made lower tha inside ink reservoir chamber 111 as a result of the packaging space decom film 160 of ink cartridge 14 can be plastically deformed on the side of p (side of case 200) If the air pressure inside packaging bag 930 is higher tha inside ink reservoir chamber 111, film 160 sometimes hardens and loses damaged in the state in which the inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is de ink cartridge 14 is left without being used for a long period of time. Wh flexibility, the shape of ink reservoir chamber 111 do not change, and becomes nonuniform, so ink cannot be accurately supplied Moreover, damaged, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows to the outside of However, in this embodiment, the inside of packaging bag 930 is decompre air pressure is lower than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111, s be deformed on the side of packaging bag 930 (revertible) Therefore, even it is not used for long periods of time, it is possible to reduce situations in permeable, so the air pressure of the space inside ink reservoir chambe pressure of the space inside packaging bag 930 and outside ink reservoir ch to transition to the equilibrium state, and the gas therefore moves to the o ink reservoir chamber 111. Accordingly, the deaeration of the ink store chamber 111 is promoted, and it becomes more difficult for air bubbles t printing quality can be favorably maintained
In this embodiment, ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging bag 930 in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 200, so it never ma with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink supply part 120) as packaging bag 9 decompression Valve open part 721a projects to the outside of ambient air i if packaging bag 930 makes direct contact with valve open part 721a, val operates and the ambient air intake path is sometimes opened. If the ambien opened, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out. Moreover, ambi 130 and ink supply part 120 are sometimes damaged in step with th packaging bag 930. However, in this embodiment, protector 300 is attache the damage of ambient air intake part 130 and ink supply part 120 can be p opening of the ambient air intake path can be prevented
As descπbed above, ink cartridge 14 is manufactured in a process in welded over ink reservoir element 100 after ink is dispensed inside ink reser of frame part 110 With some conventional ink cartridges, ink was dispense case after the ink reservoir element was covered with the case (after the as cartridge is completely finished) With such a conventional ink cartridge, it prepare a frame and a case according to the amount of ink stored and the However, in this embodiment, case 200 is covered after ink is dispensed chamber 111 of ink reservoir element 100, so common parts can be used described with reference to Figure 40. Figure 40 is a diagram that shows the ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction device 1.
When ink cartridge 14 is to be attached to multifunction device 1, pac first broken, and ink cartridge 14 is removed from the inside of packagi protector 300 is removed from case 200 The direction in which each ink color, for black, and for large-capacity black) is installed into multifunctio same
First, the internal structure of refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 with reference to Figure 40(a) In refill unit 13, as described above, needle 4 lower portion of the side of back surface 56 of case 40, and needle installation direction F (arrow F in Figure 40(a)) of ink cartridge 14 As is 40(c), this installation direction F is parallel to the longitudinal direction ( B, X-direction) of ink cartridge 14, which is installed into refill unit 1 detection sensor 57 is provided above needle 49 Remaining ink detect roughly formed into a left-facing horseshoe shape, and the open end of the h light emitting part 57a, which emits light, while the other end is light recei illustrated in the figure), which receives light. This light emitting part 57a a part 57b are respectively inserted into through-holes formed by case cutout and detection part 140, and are attached such that they project from Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is configured such that it does not out signal to a control unit provided on multifunction device 1 when light r receives light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a and outputs (or d signal to the control device when light that is emitted from light emitting p and is not received by light receiving part 57b As illustrated in Figure 40(a), when ink cartridge 14 (in the state in whic is the one side surface of case 200 positioned in the front in installation dir cartridge 14 is in the regular installation position Therefore, because ink detection part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are provided such that (located close to each other) on a single end surface, remaining ink det needle 49, and passage 54, which are required on the side of multifunction consolidated (located close to each other) onto a single surface (back s supply part 120 were provided on the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14 140 and ambient air intake part 130 were provided on the side surface of i would become necessary to establish needle 49 on the bottom surface side o unit 13 and establish remaining ink detection sensor 57 and passage 54 on t surface (back surface 56) of case 40, and the scale of multifunction device 1 these were provided, being diversified (located relatively far away from eac in this embodiment, these parts are consolidated (located close to each othe multifunction device 1 can be reduced Ink supply part 120 and detection part 140 are sequentially provided surface from top to bottom, and by usingsensor arm 470 for detecting rema use of the mk can be improved This is due to the following reasons
When the amount of remaimng ink is detected by irradiating a portion o (corresponding to detection part 140 in this embodiment) using (corresponding to remaining ink detection sensor 57 in this embodiment) which the presence of ink is detected directly (method for detecting the am ink based on whether or not ink is present in the light path of the photodet the ink could not be fully used with a configuration in which the ink (corresponding to ink supply part 120 in this embodiment) and the irrad irradiated by photodetector (detection part 140) are both provided on a sing photodetector, the amount of ink that is left over becomes large. However, i sensor arm 470 is used, so even if the irradiated part is provided in a relativ the absence of ink can be detected in step with the timing in which the remaining ink becomes low, and the ink supply opening is provided in a low is little leftover ink (The description is given out of place, but a remain method using sensor arm 470 will be described in detail below.)
As long as the configuration of the ink cartridge is such that the ink provided on the bottom surface of the ink cartridge and the irradiated part i side surface of the ink cartridge, ink will be fully used even if a method th the presence of ink is used However, in this case, there is the separ multifunction device 1 increases in size In other words, only with the inve this embodiment can both the reduction of the scale of multifunction improvement of the full use of ink be realized
As described in Figure 40(a), ink cartridge 14 is installed in a proce protruding parts 214a and 224a (first case welded parts 216 and 226) of cas to slide on door main body 60, and the back surface of ink cartridge installation direction F until most of ink cartridge 14 is inserted into refill u as described above, sloping surfaces 214a2 and 224a2 are formed on cas 214a and 224a, so ink cartridge 14 can be smoothly inserted due to these 214a2 and 224a2 As illustrated in Figure 40(a), a portion of the back surfac 14 is push part 200a, and this is a part that is pushed such that it makes con retaining member 61.
As illustrated in Figure 40(b), when ink cartridge 14 is in the state in mside refill unit 13 in installation direction F, protrusion 55 is fitted into a case protruding grooves 214b2 and 224b2 Further, the tip of needle 49 is arrow illustrated in Figure 40 (b), the pushing retaining member 61 of the contacts the push part 200a forming a portion of the back surface of the pushing the ink cartridge 14 in the installation direction F As the door me further, the door lock member 62 of the door member 60 fits mto the lock m 46 of the refill unit 13, completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 (t 40 (c)) The middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central positi direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14 The position where the member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position including the middle cartridge 14 and extending below the middle point p In other words, the provided at a position above the ink supply part 120 and below the ambient in the vertical direction Although illustration and description of this will be state of Figure 40 (c) is reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b parts 217a and 227a and retains the ink cartridge 14
Once installation of the ink cartridge 14 is completed, the needle 49 is in supply part 120 and ink supply is enabled, the valve opening part 721a o intake part 130 contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, enabling intake o the remaining ink detection sensor 57 is inserted through the through-hole fo cutout parts 213 and 223 and the detection part 140, enabling detection quantity of ink The details of this will be described later. Furthermore, since the remaining ink sensor 57 is inserted through formed by the case cutout parts 213 and 223 and the detection part 140 when 14 is installed in the refill unit 13, the light emitting part 57a and the light r of the remaimng ink detection sensor 57 become positioned inside the c becomes possible to prevent damage to the remaining ink detection sens preventing misdetection due to dirt, dust or the like adhering to the light emi retaining member 61 is configured to have a greater elastic force than generated by the spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able t ink cartridge 14 once it has been installed Furthermore, the push part 200a by the pushing retaimng member 61 is located substantially in the middle supply part 120 and the ambient air intake part 130, allowing a substantiall force to be applied to the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air intake because the ink cartridge 14 is retained at three points in the installation di cartridge 14 - one point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing retai and two points at the back of the refill unit 13 (the ink supply part 120 an intake part 130), with the imaginary line linking these three points formin isosceles triangle shape Thus, retaining the ink cartridge 14 by three poin cartridge 14 to be retained stably Furthermore, since the elastic force of the member 61 is used to retain the ink cartridge 14, the load on the surface of 14 decreases as compared to the case of a mechanical structure where the i secured by engagement with its surface Thus, it becomes possible to preve ink cartridge 14 through excessive loads being applied thereto.
Furthermore, since the pushing retaining member 61 pushes below the (midpoint p) in the height direction of the ink cartridge 14, a large force operate the door member 60, making it possible to stably retain the ink prescribed position The pivot of rotation of the door member 60 is located of the case 40, and the user performs the operation of opemng and closing by manipulating the edge part of the door member 60. Thus, if the push part at the upper part of the back surface of the ink cartridge 14, the point of ac pushing retaining member 61 pushes the ink cartridge 14 will be at a distan of rotation of the door member 60, thus requiring a large force for the user part 120, a large force is not required to operate the door member, making it install the ink cartridge at the prescπbed location
Here, referring to Figure 41, the operation of the ink supply mecha ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in device 1 will be described Figure 41 is a drawing illustrating the state with 14 having been installed in the multifunction device 1. Since Figure 41 i purpose of explaining the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and mechanism 510, the case 200, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction devi have been omitted from the drawing As illustrated in Figure 41, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in device 1 (inside the refill unit 13), the light emitting part 57a and the light r (not illustrated) of the remaimng ink detection sensor 57 are arran sandwiching the detection part 140 The detection part 140 consists transparent resin material, allowing the light emitted from the light emittin remaining ink detection sensor 57 to pass through the detection part 140 a the light receiving part 57b Since the shielding arm part 473c of the s arranged in the enclosure part 141 of the detection part 140, as described abo ink quantity can be detected by the operation of this sensor arm 470. The sensor arm will be described later. With regard to the ink supply mechanism 500, when the ink cartridge 14 multifunction device 1 , the needle 49 is inserted through the space surround wall 606d of the supply cap 600, the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 60 path 615 of the supply joint 600 in that order, and the tip of the needle 49 bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620, depressing the supply valve 620 supply valve 620 moves away from the joint contact part 613 of the supply j supply valve 620 (and supply slider 640), as described above, has a slig flexible part 633 On the other hand, there is no flexing in the spring flexib second supply spring 650 arranged on the opposite side of the supply slider supply spring 630 This serves to determine the flexing order of the first a springs 630 and 650. In other words, the first supply spring 630 with the flex part 633 flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that whe inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second supply thereafter
Here, the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of a dimensional error from the manufacturing of the various componen components there are, the more likely that dimensional error will occur H supply slider 640 is brought into contact with the valve hook part 626 of t 610, at least the error m the dimensions of the first supply spring 630 be Thus, dimensional error of the ink supply mechanism 500 is reduced an operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 becomes more stable
Furthermore, the mside diameter of the valve outer circumferential wall valve 620 and the outside diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall slider 640 are formed to be substantially equal Thus, it becomes possib occurrence of misalignment in the direction of displacement when the s operates in the direction of axis Ol of the ink supply mechanism 500. Furth diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall 641 and the outside diam bottom parts 631 and 651 of the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 substantially equal Thus, it becomes possible to reduce misalignment orthogonal to axis Ol (the up-down direction in Figure 41) when the first members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider pedestal part 644 of the s needle 49 and moves in the direction of valve seat 660 (nghtward accompanying this movement, the first supply spring 630 is flexibly de become compressed, whereupon the supply slider 640 moves in the direct 660 (the direction opposite to the impelling direction of the first supply sprin supply spring 650), and the second supply spring undergoes flexible deform the state illustrated in Figure 41.
Once the ink cartridge 14 has been installed in the case 40 of the multif the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 also undergo elastic deform ink flow path K indicated by arrow K. The ink flow path K is a flow path fo ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14), second supply communicatin supply communicating hole 421, first cover through-hole 683 (and second c 684) of cover 680, first valve seat through-hole 662b and second valve seat of valve seat 660, valve seat communicating groove 664 of valve seat 660, i of second supply spπng 650, slider through-hole 645 of supply slider 640, i of first supply spring member 630, first spring member 930 and valve bearin a flow path which leads successively through the ink flow path 627 of s cutout 49a of needle 49 and the inside of needle 49 The space betwee circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 and the inner circumferent ink supply member 116 is also an ink flow path. Here, the operation of the supply joint 610 when the needle 49 is in supply joint 610 will be described When the needle 49 is press-fitted into t flow path 615b through the step part flow path 615a, the joint protruding par the needle 49 due to the friction between its own inner circumferential surf outer circumferential surface of the needle 49 and is displaced in the directio the right in Figure 41) of the needle 49 (displaced into the contact part flow surface going from the inner circumferential surface 614a of the joint protr the tip 613a of the joint contact part 613, as the needle 49 was inserted, th part 614 would deform so as to be displaced in the direction of insertion of deformation of the joint protruding part 614 would be directly transmitted t part 613, and the joint contact part 613 would be displaced in the dire together with the joint protruding part 614 As a result, the insertion stroke for forming an ink flow path between the supply valve 620 and the joint would become longer, so the needle 49 would have to be made longer Fu needle 49 becomes longer, it becomes more likely to be damaged by c members, and the length of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the dire becomes longer, thus increasing its size. However, in the present embodime contact part 613 is displaced in a direction substantially orthogonal to insertion of the needle 49, the stroke for forming an ink flow path does not long Thus, it becomes possible to reduce contact of the needle 49 with reducing damage as well as reducing the size increase of the ink supply mech
When the ink cartridge 14 is removed form the multifunction device 1, withdrawn, whereupon the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620 contact part 613, obstructing the ink flow path K. Here, the second s becomes fully stretched, while the first supply string 630 returns to a slightly state
When the ink cartridge 14 is removed form the multifunction device 1, a withdrawn, the ink present in the vicinity of the ink flow path 615 of the sup contact part flow path 615c and the protruding part flow path 615b) flows t 600 (leftward in Figure 41) and flows out into the step part flow path 615a the quantity of ink which flows out into the step part flow path 615a is intake mechanism 510, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multif the valve opening part 721a of the ambient air valve 720 contacts the back case 40, depressing the ambient air valve 720 As a result, the ambient air v away from the joint contact part 713 of the ambient air joint 710, formi intake path L as illustrated by arrow L in the drawings. Furthermore, when part 721a of the ambient air valve 720 contacts and is depressed by the ba joint stroke part 714 of the ambient air joint 710 contacts the back surface skirt part 714 undergoes flexible deformation so as to expand (or contract) result, it becomes tightly held against the back surface 56, blocking the out the joint skirt part 714 In the back surface 56 on the inside of the joint skirt formed a passage 54 which serves as a passage for taking in ambient air, into the ink reservoir chamber 111 via this passage 54.
The operation of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ambie depressed will be described. The first ambient air spring 730 housed insid valve 720 (and the ambient air slider 740), as described above, has a slig flexible part 733, while there is no flexing in the spring flexible part 7 ambient air spring 750 Thus, the flexing order is determined for the first an air springs 730 and 750 as well.
Furthermore, the inside diameter of the valve outer circumferential ambient air valve 720 and the inside diameter of the slider outer circumfer the ambient air valve 720 are formed to be substantially equal. Thus, t misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient air slider 7 direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 can be preven the inside diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the out the spring bottom parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air spr circumferential wall 722 of the ambient air valve 720, misalignment in displacement when the ambient air valve 720 operates in the direction o prevented Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis 02 o intake mechanism 510 is stabilized. Furthermore, when the ambient air valve 720 is depressed by the valve i and moves m the direction of protruding part 811 (rightward in Figure 41 movement, the first ambient air spring 730 undergoes flexible deformation compressed, and when the ambient air valve 720 is depressed, the ambi moves in the direction of protruding part 811 and the second ambien undergoes flexible deformation This state is the state illustrated in Figure 41.
When the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the case 40 of the multifunction and second ambient air springs 730 and 750 also undergo elastic deform ambient air intake path L illustrated by arrow L The ambient air intake pat passing successively through the path formed between the joint passage 715 joint 710, the ink flow path 727 of the ambient air valve 720, the first ambi and the valve bearing part 728; the path formed between the ink flow pat ambient air spring 730, the slider through-hole 745 of the ambient air slider path 754 of the second ambient air spring 750, the spring top part 752 of th air spring 750 and the protruding part 811; and the first ambient air commu This flow path is the main flow path through which the majority of the a Furthermore, the space between the valve outer circumferential wall 722 o valve 720 and the inner circumferential surface 810 of the ambient air intake forms part of the ambient air intake path Subsequently, as illustrated in Figu passes through the first ambient air communicating chamber 431, commu 433a, ambient air connection passage 433, communicating opening 433b, se that they operate smoothly and without misalignment relative to the axes installation of the ink cartridge 14 is made easier, while allowing the supp intake of ambient air to be carried out reliably
Next, referring to Figure 42 and Figure 43, the method of detecting t remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 will be descπbed Figure illustrating the operation of the sensor arm 470 according to the quantity o the ink reservoir chamber 111 Figure 42 (a) illustrates the state with rem Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty). Figur schematically illustrating the operating principle of the sensor arm 470 The direction of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by the com buoyancies and the gravities acting on the nght side portion (on the side of part 473c) and the left side (on the side of the balance part 471). Ho simplify the explanation, the descnption will now be made assuming that which are exerted on the sensor arm 470, act on the balance part 471 description, the buoyancies and the gravities, which act on the portions of t other than the balance part 471, are neglected Instead, it is considered th and the gravities, which are received by the entire sensor arm 470, act on the On this assumption, the rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by the gravity acting on the balance part 471 As illustrated in Figure 42 (a), in large amount of ink is stored in the ink reservoir chamber 111 (in the st stored is at least above the level of the lower ends of the inner circumfere 415a, 415b, 416a and 416b), since the balance part 471 of the sensor arm 47 resin material with lower specific gravity than the specific gravity of the i generated on the balance part 471 increases, and the balance part 471 floats the balance part 471 is inside the ink, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the com As the ink inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 passes through the ink decreases in quantity, the liquid surface I of the ink drops. As the liquid su drops, the blocking arm part 473c emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink, the balance part 471 also emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink Whe 471 emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink, the buoyancy generated o 471, which causes the sensor arm 470 to rotate in the clockwise direction arrow Gl in Figure 43) and the gravity generated on the balance part 471, sensor arm 470 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction (the direction Figure 43) balance each other out, so the overall combined force is balanced the liquid surface I of the ink drops further, the balance part 471 moves do the liquid surface I, so the sensor arm 470 rotates counterclockwise. This causes the shielding arm part 473c to move upward away from the arm su and an optical path is created between the light emitting part 57a and light re the remaimng ink detection sensor 57 This state is the out-of-ink state, in w (not illustrated) of the multifunction device 1 discriminates that the ink cartri
In the foregoing description, as illustrated in Figure 42 (b), the bal positioned near the bottom part 400bl (see Figure 15) of the ink reservoir c almost no ink remains Thus, when the quantity of ink remaimng in the ink r 111 has become low, an out-of-ink discrimination can be correctly made. As illustrated in Figure 42 (b), in the out-of-ink state, there is still some ink reservoir chamber 111. The ink surface I at this time is slightly higher th forming the bottom of the ink reservoir chamber 111. Furthermore, as dis ink reservoir chamber 111 and the ink supply part 120 communicate vi chamber 426 (see Figure 15) delimited by the supply partition wall 422, and chamber 111 and the ink supply chamber 426 communicate via th communicating hole 423 below the part 400bl forming the bottom part of chamber 111, it becomes possible to reliably prevent ink from running out be detected. Furthermore, when an out-of-ink state is discriminated, there is h the bottom part 400bl of the ink reservoir chamber 111, with ink remainin concave part space 424a, which is a relatively narrow space formed at a lo bottom part 400bl in the ink reservoir chamber 111, so that the quantit remaimng when an out-of-ink state is detected is extremely small, eliminatin
Once the out-of-ink discrimination has been made, to indicate to the user out of ink, the out-of-ink lamp is illuminated or audio is used to inform device is out of ink It is also possible to use a counter provided in the contr the number of times ink has been discharged and to detect the quantity of additionally employing a software counter which hypothetically determines out of ink
As illustrated in Figure 42 (a) and Figure 42 (b), the attachment position shaft 472a of the sensor arm 470 and of the arm sandwiching part 425 of th i e the position of the center (pivot) about which the sensor arm 470 rot below the detection part 140 and above the ink supply part 120, and is posi (to the left in Figure 42 (a) and Figure 42 (b)) of the supply path formin direction of installation of the ink cartridge 14 In the present embodiment, t 120, ambient air intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged toge surface of the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink su ambient air intake mechanism and remaimng ink detection mechanism) together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1, preventing the s unit 13 from becoming complicated, and also reducing its size. Furthermor part 120, being a part which supplies ink by causing it to flow out to the mul detection part 140, the length of the space between the balance part 417 a part 472 will become greater and the sensor arm 470 will become larger, quantity of ink will decline accordingly On the other hand, if the positio rotation of the sensor arm 470 is arranged below the ink supply part 120, t of the balance part 471 will become extremely small, making detection of in Thus, in the present embodiment, the position of the center of rotation of t (the "pivot" consisting of the attachment part 472) is arranged above the in and below the detection part 140 Consequently, as described above, ink- detected and reduction of the ink reservoir capacity due to increased size 470 is avoided.
Furthermore, in the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment, if the b arranged in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 422, the balance part 47 second supply communicating hole 423 and the vibration caused by operati part 471 will be transmitted to the ink, interfering with ink flow. In partic surface I of the ink becomes wavy, ambient air may enter mside the supply through the second supply communicating hole 423, hindering the supply o placing the balance part 471 extremely far from the supply partition wall 4 arm part 473 larger, so the balance part 471 will also have to become buoyancy of the balance part 471 Consequently, the amount of ink, which c ink reservoir chamber 111, will decrease Thus, in the present embodiment, t center of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is placed in the vicinity of the sup 422 and the balance part 471 is positioned at the middle of the ink reservoi the Y direction, avoiding the aforementioned enlargement of the sensor effects on ink flow When the sensor arm 470 is attached to the arm sandwiching part 425 Thus, in the present embodiment, the top end surface forming the outsid part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle so as to slope downw portion of the shielding arm 473c that is substantially parallel to the liquid s Thus, the force exerted by the surface tension of the ink on the shielding reduced, allowing the sensor arm 470 to operate normally
Here, referring to Figure 44, the case where the ink cartridge 14 is ins orientation will be discussed Figure 44 is a cross-sectional view illustratin the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunction device 1 in a wrong orie
As illustrated in Figure 44, when the ink cartridge 14 is inserted into t and bottom are reversed relative to the proper installation orientation, the protruding parts 214a and 224a will collide with the tip of the protrusion 5 with the top and bottom reversed from the proper installation orientation, th 120 will be located above the ambient air intake part 130, resulting in an inc (or a second orientation) with respect to the proper installation orientation As illustrated in Figure 44, the total projection distance t9 includin distance of the protrusion 55 from the back surface 56 of the case 40 a distance of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a from the case 200 i projection distance t8 of the needle 49 from the needle forming member difference between projection distance t8 and projection distance t9 prevents the tip of the valve opening part 721a projecting outward from the ambient a and the tip of the needle 49. The needle 49 is a member for extracting the i cartridge 14 and supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrate cases where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately supp is not performed accurately Thus, it is, not desirable for the needle 49 t deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve opening part 72 upside-down from the proper installation orientation, the remaining ink de may collide with the outer wall of the case 200, which may damage t detection sensor 57 However, since a difference is provided between proj and projection distance t9, it becomes possible to prevent damage to t detection sensor 57 due to collision with the outer wall of the case 200, ma accurately detect the remaimng quantity of ink
Next, referring to Figure 45, the method of removing the ink cartri installed state in multifunction device 1 will be described Figure 45 is a dr the method of removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction device 1 As illustrated in Figure 45 (a), to remove the ink cartridge 14 from device 1 (refill unit 13), the lock release lever 63 of the door 41 is rotated f in Figure 45 (a)) (rotated in the direction of the arrow in Figure 45 (a)) As when the lock release lever 63 is rotated, the engagement between the door and the lock member fitting part 46 is disengaged, and as a result, the door forward
A portion of the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65 of the do inside the concave parts 216a and 226a (concave part 226a is to the rear in is thus not illustrated) of case 200, so when rotated by the lock release lever curved part 65b of the pullout member 65 of door 41 contacts the latch par (latch part 226b is to the rear in Figure 45 (b) and is thus not illustrated) of state of Figure 45 (b)). When the door 41 is rotated further forward (in th arrow in Figure 45 (b)) from the state of Figure 45 (b), the latch parts 216 case 200 are pulled out by the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65, an ink cartridge 14 projects from inside the case 40 as a result (the state of Fig this state, the user can easily remove the ink cartridge 14 Thus, the oper As discussed above, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multif the needle 49 is inserted inside the ink supply part 120 The ink supply includes a valve mechanism impelled by a first supply spring 630 and a sec 650, so when removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction devic from the state of Figure 46 (a) to the state of Figure 46 (b)), ink may adhere tip of the needle 49, or in the worst case, ink may flow out from the ink supp the valve 620 moves in the direction such that it contacts with the joint conta the impelling force of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spr needle 49 is removed from the supply joint 610, ink is pushed out in the dir flows out from the protruding part flow path 615b to the step part flow path may stick to the protruding tip 49 of the needle or flow outside the ink Consequently, when the ink cartridge 14 is removed, the ink adhering to the 49 may drip down in the form of ink drops, or ink may flow down from th 120 However, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 46 (b), sin
(first protruding part) consisting of the case projecting parts 214a and 224 outward (rightward in Figure 46 (b)) than the projecting tip of the ink supply the ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips down in the form of ink dro down from the ink supply part 120, the dripped ink can be made to adhere part 120 side surface of the case projecting parts 214a and 224a. Furthermo projecting parts 214a and 224a and the ink supply part 120 are positioned r each other, it is easy to make the ink dripping from the ink supply part 120 projectmg parts 214a and 224a.
As illustrated in Figure 46 (c), the insertion hole 605 of the supply c supply opening into which the needle 49 is inserted and through which ink - from the insertion hole 605, the dripped ink can be caught by the case proj and 224a Furthermore, since the case projecting parts 214a and 224a proje the left-right direction of Figure 46 (a) and (b)) in the installation orientatio 14, and the surface on the ink supply part 120 side is formed to be substan adhering to the case projecting parts 214a and 224a can be prevented fro down As a result, it is possible to prevent ink from dripping down into and of the refill unit 13 If the inside of the refill unit 13 is dirtied, the ink car dirtied during installation or removal of the cartridge 14, thus making the u However, such problems can be avoided by preventing the ink from adherin the refill unit 13 as much as possible
While the configuration descπbed above is desirable for prevention configuration is not limited thereto, so long as, as illustrated in Figure projecting parts 214a and 224a are at least partially located over the line pa center of communicating hole 605 (line p in Figure 46 (c); the line passing t of the opemng 600a of the supply cap 600) in the vertical direction of ink up-down direction in Figure 46 (c)) This is because much of the ink drippi ink supply part 120 and needle 49 will be able to take a downward p Therefore, even if the length of the case projecting parts 214a and 224a direction of the ink cartridge 14 is made shorter than the length tlO in the wi of the insertion hole 605, a configuration of this sort can contribute to t dirtying of the refill unit 13. In this case, the ink retaining force of the cas 214a and 224a is weakened, so it can be assumed that ink which has been c projecting parts 214a and 224a may drip down into the refill unit 13 cartridge 14 to be replaced is hardly ever left for a long time inside the refill with the tip of the needle 49 having been withdrawn from the ink supply unit 13 to a greater extent than if the case projecting parts 214a and 224a wer
Next, referring to Figure 47, the structure, which reduces the adhesi detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the ink cart described. Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the structure, which reduces th to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the Figure 47 (a) illustrates the state of installing or removing the ink cartrid refill unit 13 (multifunction device 1); Figure 47 (b) is a drawing which illus where the detection part 140 of the ink cartridge 14 is formed, and Fi perspective view of ink cartridge 14. The ink cartridge 14 of Figure 47 (a simplified fashion without showing the detailed structure, as this figure serv outer shape of the ink cartridge 14 and its positional relationship to the detect
As illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the refill unit 13, ink may spatter from the projecting tip of the ink suppl projecting tip of the needle 49 This is due to the fact that the ink supply the ink supply part 120 opens and closes with the help of the elastic forc second supply springs 630 and 650, and thus the pressure of the ink chan installation and removal of the ink cartridge 14, causing the ink held insi mechanism 500 to fly out forcefully, and the fact that when the needle 49 is to the outside from the state of being positioned inside the ink supply part 1 where the ink cartridge 14 is installed), the ink may flow back and spatter N of ink does not occur every time the ink cartridge 14 is installed or removed time no ink may spatter
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartridge 14 is orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned at a position corresponding ink detection sensor 57, so the detection part 140 is positioned above the in the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will adhere to the detection surfac making it possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (b), if the ink cartridge 14 is re and placed such that the positional relationship of the ink supply part 12 intake part 130 is upside down relative to the installation orientation of th (the orientation of Figure 47 (a)), ink may drip down from the insertion hole cap 600 of the ink supply part 120 Since the ink dripping form the insertio under its own weight, it will flow out in substantially linear fashion in th detection part 140 and adhere to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of 140.
However, when the detection part 140 is in a state arranged below the a part 130 and above the ink supply part 120 (the state of Figure 47 (b)), the 140a and 140b of the detection part 140 will be arranged vertically (the u with reference to the direction of the symbol in Figure 47 (b)), so the in detection surfaces 140a and 140b will drip down to the ambient air intake p its own weight. Furthermore, since the surface of the detection surfaces 1 formed out of a resin material into a smooth plane, adhering ink can flow d it becomes possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the side surface of d Furthermore, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed, the ink supply part 120 lower part and the ambient air intake part 130 is located at the upper part ( Figure 47 (a)), so even if there is ink adhering to the detection part 140 duri removal of the ink cartridge 14, the ink will flow to the ink supply part 12 possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 14 discussed above, the edge part 40 of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b an 100a of the frame part 110 is formed substantially as a right angle, so in 200, so even if ink should spatter, adhesion of the spattered ink to the detect and 140b can be reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply outward from the case 200, in the installation orientation of ink cartridg Figure 47 (a)), the distance to the detection part 140 becomes farther. Thus, t spattered ink does not reach the detection part 140, making it possible to re of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b Furthermore, the case proj and 224a and the case projecting parts 214b and 224b are formed at the en part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 are located between the case proj and 224a and the case projecting parts 214b and 224b, and the case projecti 224a and the case projecting parts 214b and 224b extend further outward th part 120 Thus, if the ink cartridge 14 is inadvertently dropped, the ink suppl prevented from contacting the surface, which the ink cartridge 14 is drop possible to reduce outflow of ink from the ink supply part 120 due to the sh a result, the adhesion of the ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b can Next, referring to Figure 48 and Figure 49, the case 40 (see Figure 2) o will be descπbed Figure 48 is a drawing showing the front view of the case is a front view of case 40, which can accommodate large capacity blac cartridges 14 and color ink cartridges 14, and Figure 48 (b) is a front vi which can accommodate black ink cartridges 14 and color ink cartridges 1 embodiment, case 40 is arranged in the multifunction device 1, but it is provide a multifunction device 1 wherein case 2040 is arranged instead of c is a cross-sectional view showing the simplified cross-section of cases 40 an
Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross-sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is a simplified cro of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 48 (b) Fig color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side by side, and a large capacity b 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjacent thereto In other capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or the black ink cartridge 14kl is selective at an end position in the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left Figure 48 (a)) The case 40 illustrated in Figure 48 (a) accommodates a lar ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 48 (b), case 2040 is configured to accommodate cartridges Regarding the arrangement of the four ink cartridges, three color are arranged side by side, and a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjace words, just as in case 40, the black ink cartridge 14kl is accommodated at the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left-right direction in Fig
Since case 40 allows both a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 cartridge 14kl to be installed, it is formed to accommodate the thickness of black ink cartridge 14k2 Thus, the lateral width tl4 (the width in the direc of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2, the left-right direction in Figure 48 longer than the lateral width tl5 (the width in the direction of alignment of 14c and 14kl, the left-right direction in Figure 48 (b)) The difference b width tl4 of case 40 and the lateral width tl5 of case 2040 corresponds between the height of the vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of the second illustrated in Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 22 case member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
Furthermore, case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14kl or a large c cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 2040 only allows install cartridge 14kl This implies providing users with two types of multifunc already discussed above, since users whose frequency of text printing is l cartridges 14c and 14k2. The gaps tl6 between the needles 49 penetrati cartridges 14c are equal, while the gap tl7 between the needle 49 penetrat capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 and the needle 49 penetrating the a cartridge 14c is formed to have a longer distance than gap tl6 The differ tl6 and gap tl7 corresponds to the difference between the height of the v 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the hei wall parts 2210b to 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure
As illustrated in Figure 49 (b), when the ink cartridges 14c and 14kl a mside the case 2040, a needle 49 penetrates inside the ink supply mechanis the ink cartridges 14c and 14kl The gap tl6 between needles 49 penetrati cartridges 14c and the gap tl7 between the needle 49 penetrating into the b 14kl and the needle 49 penetrating into the adjacent color ink cartridge 14 length as gaps tl6 and tl7 of case 40 This is because the state of (accommodation orientation) of the black ink cartridge 14kl in case 2040 i the first case member 1210 of the black ink cartridge 14kl on the color ink c thereby making the distance between the needle 49 penetrating into the bl 14kl and the needle 49 penetrating into the adjacent color ink cartridge 14 distance between the needle 49 penetrating into the large capacity black ink case 40 and the needle 49 penetrating into the adjacent color ink cartridge 14 this is because the position of the ink supply part 120 of the ink cartrid position of the ink supply part 120 of ink cartridge 14k2 are the same relati of the ink supply part 120 of the ink cartridge 14c As a result, identica members 48 can be provided in case 40 and case 2040 even through the later tl5 of cases 40 and 2040 may differ, making the needle forming memb component and making it possible to reduce costs when fabricating two cas needles 49 The needles 49 are parts, which supply ink to the multifunction a different ink color is mixed into a needle 49, color change will occur du printing quality will decline. In the present embodiment, the black ink is a while the color inks consist of dye type inks This is because black ink is u text pnnting, and is thus made from a pigment type ink with low permeabi order to make the edges of the characters clear, while color ink is used pri printing, so it is made from a dye type ink with high permeability into paper the granularity of dots less apparent and improve the appearance of the col there is little effect of color change when color inks are mixed together, whe with another color ink, the effect of color change becomes greater, so it is black ink to be mixed with other color inks Furthermore, when mixing wit has been confirmed, generally, recovery processing (purging) involving forc ink is carried out, but since ink is wasted for the recovery processing, t efficiency drops Moreover, since black ink is a pigment type ink, it has compared to dye type ink, so it cannot be easily removed even if recov carried out. However, in the present embodiment, the ink cartridges 14kl black ink are arranged at the end in the direction of arrangement in the cas supply part 120 (and needle 49) are shifted away from the color ink cartridg black ink should spatter, the spattered ink would be unlikely to adhere to th 49 Therefore, decline in printing quality can be suppressed, as can the amounts of ink for recovery processing
Next, referring to Figure 50, the state of installation of the large ca cartridge 14k2 or black ink cartridge 14kl and color ink cartridges 14c in described Figure 50 is a simplified cross-section illustrating in simplified fa installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14kl and 14k2 inside case 40. Figure 50 Furthermore, the space between accommodating grooves 42c 1 and 42 between accommodating grooves 42c2 and 42c3 provide a separation dista space between accommodating grooves 42c3 and 42c4 provides a separa longer than distance tl2 This is because, as discussed above, the black ink formed with a larger outer shape than the other color ink cartridges 14c, so t 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the black ink cartridge 14kl are at a p the difference between distance tl2 and distance tl3 in the direction away fr part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the other color ink cartridges direction in Figure 50). The difference between distance tl2 and distance t the difference between gap tlό and gap tl7 between needles 49 desc corresponds to the difference between the higher of verticals wall parts 21 first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the height of vertical w 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure 13, or the di vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe of the first case member 1210 illustrated i
Furthermore, a prescribed space X is formed between the outer surface o 220 of the black ink cartridge 14kl and the inner surface of the side pl prescribed space X is formed to allow for the large capacity black ink cartrid as illustrated in Figure 50 (b), it serves to allow the refill unit 13 to be used ink cartridge 14kl and the large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 50 (b), when a large capacity black ink cartridge in the refill unit 13, the space that would be formed when a black ink installed becomes occupied. Furthermore, the positions of the ink supp ambient air intake part 130 are the same when ink cartridge 14kl is install cartridge 14k2 is installed Thus, the same case 40 can be used with black in 220b to 22Oe of the first and second case members 210 and 220; the left Figure 51 (a)) being respectively tl8
Figure 51 (b) is a schematic drawing of case 2200 Case 2200 comprise case members 2210 and 2220, with the thicknesses of the first and second c and 2220 (the height of vertical wall parts 2210b to 221Oe and 2220b to 222 second case members 2210 and 2220, the left-right direction in Fig respectively tl9, which is approximately twice the thickness of tl8
Figure 51 (c) is a schematic drawing of case 1200 Case 1200 comprise case members 1210 and 220, with the thicknesses of the first and second ca and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe and 220b to 22O second case members 1210 and 220; the left-right direction in Figure 51(c)) first case member 1210 and tl8 for the second case member 220
Thus, according to the present embodiment, three types of cases - 200, with different sizes of the outer shape (different inside volumes) are form case members of different thickness and two second case members of diffe the present embodiment, the thicknesses of the first and second case mem forming case 200 are equal, and the thicknesses of the first and second ca and 2220 forming case 2200 are also equal, but making the thicknesses equa not an indispensable condition for forming three types of cases - 200, 12 different outer shape sizes.
Namely, so long as the thickness of one side (the first case member members making up the largest first ink cartridge (case 2200) is greater tha one side (the first case member 210) of the case members making up the cartridge (case 200), and the thickness of the other side (the second case me case members making up the largest first ink cartridge is greater than the types of dies being necessary if dies are fabricated for all the cases. Namely 1200 and 2200 have a space inside them, at least two members are necessary of them, for instance, a vessel main body open on one surface and a lid mem that opemng Thus, with three cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different s members are necessary.
However, since dies are expensive, it is desirable to share them as much present embodiment, the second case member 220 for black is made commo case member 220 for color. Thus, a special die is not necessary for the sec 220 for black, providing a reduction in costs Moreover, the first case memb merely involves making the first case member 210 for color deeper and pro Thus, the tip side of the vertical wall parts 1210b to 1210e past the rib 121 member 1210 used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertic to 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore, the first ca and 210 can be manufactured by using a common die for the main portio members 1201 and 210, and changing between a member corresponding member 210 and a member corresponding to the first case member 1210. T reduced as compared to when two types of molds are fabπcated. Furthermo case member 2210 for large capacity black has the same shape as the first c for black but without the rib 1218, a common die can be used for the main p case members 210, 1201 and 2210 In this way, even when there are mult cartridges 144c, 14kl and 14k2, a cost reduction can be achieved by using much as possible
Furthermore, in cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from e through-holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part the outside are made the same shape, and substantially semi-circular case case 200 and a first case member 1210 formed to substantially the same shap member of case 2200 However, as illustrated in Figure 51 (d), it is also pos case 1200α from the first case member 210 of case 200 and a second ca formed to substantially the same shape as the second case member of cas vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe and 220b to 22Oe of case members 210 and be substantially equal in height, and since the vertical wall parts 210b to 22Oe of case members 2210 and 2220 are formed to be substantially eq outside shape sizes of the case 1200a and case 1200 are substantially the sam
Furthermore, it is possible to simply create a case consisting of a combin member 210 and second case member 2220 or a case consisting of a combin member 2210 and second case member 220 as the case for black. In other the combination of case members allows three cases to be created - a small large case for lager capacity black and a medium sized case for blac combination may be used Next, referring to Figure 52, a second embodiment will be described drawing illustrating the ink cartridge 3014 and refill unit 3013 of the sec Figure 52 (a) is a drawing illustrating the side surface of the ink cartridge 3 embodiment, and Figure 52 (b) shows the cross-section in the state with 3014 installed in refill unit 3013 As illustrated in Figure 52 (a), the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon configured with a different location of the ambient air intake part 130 as co cartridge 14 of the first embodiment In the ink cartridge 3014 of the sec ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge 3014 through an ambient air inta formed in a labyrinth shape going from a through-hole 3130 formed on the t case 3200 lower part of the ink cartridge 3014 Thus, in order to stably install the i inside the refill unit 3013, the pushing retaining member 3061 and the ink s configured to be substantially on the same line in the horizontal directi direction in Figure 52 (b)) Being positioned substantially on the same lin which the elastic force acts is also substantially on the same line, reducing cartridge 3014 and allowing it to be stably installed
The ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may comprise an ink 100 inside it, or may be configured such that ink is stored inside the case 320
Next, referring to Figure 53, the third and fourth embodiments will be 53 is a perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of the ink ca 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments. Figure 53 (a) is a perspective vi outward appearance of ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment, and F perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartridge 50 embodiment As illustrated in Figure 53 (a), the ink cartridge 4014 of the third e through-hole 4130 for admitting ambient air into the ink cartridge 4014 form its top surface (the top surface in Figure 53 (a)) The air admitted through 4130 passes through a labyrinth shaped air intake passage 4131 (a relativ with a small inside diameter) and is admitted inside the ink cartridge 401 4132 is glued to the ink cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow of ink cartridge 4014 before use To use the ink cartridge 4014, the seal memb off, and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
The detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting outwa surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge 4 direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is formed the ink supply part 41 which fills the opening of the joint 4122 and which is arranged in the dire side of the ink cartridge 4014 of this joint 4122, and a spring component 4 this valve 4123 in the direction of joint 4122. As a result, the valve mechani closed the ink supply port 4121 is formed Also, the partition wall 4125 that side of the ink cartridge 4014 and the ink supply part 4120 is formed as a si ink cartridge 4014 itself As illustrated in Figure 53 (a), this partition wall 4 to store the valve mechanism.
As illustrated in Figure 53(b), the ink cartridge 5014 in the fourth examp is used in lieu of the ink supply part 4120 in the third example of embodi ink supply part 120 of the first example of embodiment and the similarly s part 5120 The remaining structure is the same as the ink cartridge in the embodiment, and therefore, the detailed explanation of this will be omitted
The detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of embodime sensor arm 470 inside it, as in the first example of embodiment If it contai 470, then in the state where the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 have bee multifunction device 1, it is possible to accurately detect the amount of ink in the third and fourth examples of embodiment, the protrusion (first protru from the case protruding parts 214a and 224b and the protrusion (first protru from the case protruding parts 214b and 224b have been omitted, but it include these
Next, the fifth example of embodiment will be described while referring 55 Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 in th embodiment, and Figure 55 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within The case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment forms the second protr and 224a3 which protrude in the direction of the case protruding parts 214b direction in Figure 54) towards the case protruding parts 214a and 214b second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3, the case protruding parts 214a a the truncated L (or V or U) shaped step 214a4 and 224a4 (concave part) as s view (in relation to the first case component 210, when seen from the top of downwards, or in relation to the second case component 220, when seen fr Figure 54 looking upwards) (see Figure 55)
As illustrated in Figure 55, when the ink cartridge 14 that is forme protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3 is attached to the refill unit 13 upside do orientation), the leading edge of the protrusion 55 on the case 40 side will 214a4 and 224a4 (the step 224a4 is not illustrated in the figure) Therefor the ink cartridge 14 upside down, because the protrusion 55 will correctl 214a4 and 224a4, for instance, it is possible to consistently prevent probl protrusion 55 passes the case protruding parts 214a and 224a and goes to the case 200 in Figure 55 or to the lower side of the case protruding parts 214a a 55, and thus the ink cartridge 14 is further inserted toward the back side o right side in Figure 55) Therefore, it is possible to consistently prevent t striking the needle 49 and thus prevent destruction or deformation of the remaining ink detection sensor 57
The steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment are for (or V or U-shape) as seen from the side, but it is also acceptable to form th to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In other words, it is acceptable for i desired as long as it is a shape that will not come loose when attaching orientation and the edge of the protrusion is fitted into the steps 214a4 and 2 device 1 of the first example of embodiment Therefore, the structure o cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 of the sixth example of embodim in the first example of embodiment, and therefore, using the same refere items as in the first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will be As illustrated in Figure 56, in the multifunction device 1 of the s j embodiment, there is an ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960. Whe 14 has been attached to the correct attachment position, the edge of the cas 214a and 224a will press a protruding piece of the ink cartridge attachmen 960 and by pressing this protruding piece, the ink cartridge attachment det will send a signal to the control board 970 The control board 970 is a perform the main control of the multifunction device 1
As illustrated in Figure 57, the control board 970 includes a CPU calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory that cannot be over stores the control program and the fixed value data, a RAM 973 which is the be overwritten and which is used as the work memory, the EEPROM non-volatile memory that can be overwritten and which stores data even source is turned off, the PC interface 975 which performs electrical connect external PC 980 and the control board 970, the lnkjet printer 976 which per discharging ink as instructed by the CPU 971, the liquid crystal displa performs each type of display, the remaining ink detection sensor 57 which d of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and ink cartridge attachment dete that detects whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attached or not, and the int that performs input and output of each type of signal While it is not illustr there are also various counters and timers included, the updating of the co timer values will be performed according to the processing performed within the initial set-up process (not illustrated in the figure) after the power sourc on for the multifunction device 1 In the following explanation, the ink car detection sensor 960 will go on when the protruding piece of the ink cart sensor is pressed, and it will go off when the protruding piece is not p remaining ink detection sensor 57 will go on when the amount of light rec receiving part 57b is below a certain level (when the light path between the l 57a and the light receiving part 57b is obstructed), and it will go off when th received by the light receiving part 57b has exceeded a certain level (when from the light emitting part 57a is received by the light receiving part 57b) When the ink cartridge attachment detection process is executed, first whether the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is on or not (SlO cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is off (SlOl: No), then there is n
Figure imgf000128_0001
attached to the multifunction device 1, so setting the value of the ink cartridg 974a to be 0 (S 102), the ink cartridge will display onto the liquid crystal di the ink cartridge 14 has not been attached (S 103), and this process will end I new multifunction device 1 is being used for the first time after shipping value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a has been set to 0
As the result of confirmation by the SlOl process, if the ink cart detection sensor 960 is on (SlOl Yes), it means that the ink cartridge 14 h and then this process will confirm whether the value of the ink cartridg 974a is 1 or not (S 104) In the event that the ink cartridge 14 is attached fro being attached, the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a should and then this process will confirm whether the remaimng ink detection s not based on the timing in which the ink cartridge 14 is attached (S 105) If t detection sensor 57 is off (S 105* No), it means that the ink cartridge 14 whi remaining ink detection sensor 57 has been on for longer than the specific ti means that the remaining ink detection sensor 57 has been already on fo specific time at the timing where the ink cartridge 14 is attached, so it is con are impurities attached to the surface of the light emitting part 57a and the li 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, where these impurities are ob path between these surfaces, or it is considered that the sensor 960 malfun if the S 106 process is Yes, then a remaining ink detection sensor abn displayed on the liquid crystal display part 35 (S 107), and this process will e
Within the S 106 process, if the remaimng ink detection sensor 57 has longer than the specific time (S 106 No), next, this process will determine ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 has been on for longer than (for instance, 10 s) (S 108) As described above, the processing after "S 104 i to be performed in the event that the ink cartridge 14 is attached from the attached, and so if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 has alr longer than the specific time, there may be damage in the ink cartridge atta sensor 960 Therefore, if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 longer than the specific time (S 108 Yes), then an ink cartridge attachment abnormality will be displayed on the liquid crystal display part 35 (S 109), will end. Within the S 108 process, unless the ink cartridge attachment detection se longer than the specific time (S 108 No), when because this means that the has been correctly attached, the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 97 (SIlO), and this process will end In other words, the ink cartridge atta sensor 960 and the remaining ink detection sensor 57 will change in approx timing, and when the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set t within the ink cartridge 14, and this process will end as is, and if the remai sensor 57 is off (Sill No), then an ink empty display will be displayed on display 35 (S 112), and this process will end
When the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1, in other has been detected, the multifunction device 1 will allow execution of the pri illustrated in the figure), and therefore, it is possible to avoid execution of th in the state in which it is unclear whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attach
When each of the errors has been displayed, and if there is an abnormal executed, such as an operation of the abnormal deletion button, the ink car flag 974a will be initialized to 0.
As described above, in the sixth example of embodiment, it is not distinguish and detect the unattached state of the ink cartridge 14 and when t is also possible to detect any abnormalities in each sensor Also, when r cartridge 14, as the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 will be tur of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a will be set to 0, and therefore, it is a accurately detect whether the ink cartridge 14 is attached or whether the in when removing the ink cartridge 14, when ink is adhered to the light emitti light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, it is possi detect any abnormalities of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 when cartridge 14 Also, when removing the ink cartridge 14, if the ink cart detection sensor 960 is already broken, an ink empty display will be displa the ink cartridge 14 is not attached Therefore, it is possible for the user to re has been some sort of abnormal occurrence If an abnormal deletion operati then because the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 0, in ink cartridge 14 is attached next, then it is possible to display the abnor changed from off to on It is acceptable to allow the execution of pnnting p remaining ink detection sensor 57 detects that the ink cartridge 14 is attache
Next, referring to Figure 59, the seventh and eighth examples of em descnbed Figure 59 is an angled view showing the external appearance of 6014 and 7014 of the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment, Figure view showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge 6014 in the se embodiment, and Figure 59(b) is an angled view showing the external app cartridge 7014 of the eighth example of embodiment The ink cartridges 601 seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will be di to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth examples
Therefore, the structure other than the side surfaces on which the ink supp
5120 of the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are formed is th cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth examples of embodiment, same references for the parts that are the same as in the third and fo embodiment- will be used, and the explanation of these is omitted
As illustrated in Figure 59(a), there is a concave part 6100 formed abo part 4120 (above the ink supply part 4120 in the attached state of the ink c state in Figure 59(a)) There is a detection part 6140 formed in the centra concave part 6100 Therefore, on both sides of the detection part 6140, there in which the light emitting part 57a and the light receiving part 57b of t detection sensor 57 can be inserted
As illustrated in Figure 59(b), there is a concave part 7100 formed abo part 5120 (above the attached state of the ink cartridge 5120 (the state in Fig is a detection part 7140 formed in the central position of this concave part 71 supply parts 4120 and 5120 side as a sloped surface that is sloped in the di supply parts 4120 and 5120 By using this structure, if any ink is adhered parts 6140 and 7140, the ink will not accumulate within the concave part making it possible to reduce any adherence of ink onto the detection parts 61 The detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eighth examples o also contain sensor arms inside as in the first example of embodiment By u 470, it is possible to accurately detect the amount of ink remaining when 4014 and 5014 are attached into the multifunction device 1
Next, referring to Figure 60, we will explain the ninth example of embod is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 and refill unit 13 of the embodiment The same parts as in the first example of embodiment have th attached and the explanation of these will be omitted Also, while the struct member 65 of the door main body 60 in the mnth example of embodiment i in the first example of embodiment, the explanation of this will be omitted. As illustrated in Figure 60, the ink cartridge 8014 of the mnth example o a pushing part 8200a that is configured to contact the pressing retaining door main body 60 and that protrudes towards the outside from the side su cartridge 8014. In other words, the pushing part 200a of the first example of one part of a specific range of the side surface 1 of the case 200, but the pr of the ninth example of embodiment has the structure where there is a contacts the pressing retaining member 61 In the ninth example of embodi of the pushing part 8200a is such that it protrudes from the side surface, but form it in the opposite concave shape In this case, the pressing retaining constructed such that it protrudes from the door mam body 61
- this ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment is constructed reservoir element 100 is replaceable.
Further, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of embodiment, and t structure that is different in relation to the ink cartridge 14 of the first examp will be described, and using the same references for the same parts as in th embodiment, the explanation of these will be omitted
As illustrated in Figure 61, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example o a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 200 This seal 9100 is maximum surface 220a and the vertical wall part 220c of the second case me vertical wall part 210c and the maximum surface 210a of the first case me words, the seal 9100 is attached to the side surface opposing the protector 3 edge surface on which the ink supply part 120, the ambient air intake detection part 140 are located) The seal 9100 not only has the model of the i listed on it, but it also has imprinted on it the color corresponding to the ink is possible to visually recognize the color of the ink that is stored within 9014 Therefore, by attaching this seal 9100, it is possible for the use to visu ink color, making it possible to prevent storage of the ink cartridge 91 accommodating chamber 50 within the case 40 As illustrated in Figure 62, within the vertical wall part 210b of the first there are engagement parts 9200a and 9200b formed which protrude in th second case member 220 (in the Z direction, or in the upwards direction in F other hand, within the vertical wall part 220b of the second case memb engagement holes 9201a and 9201b formed which engage with the edges o parts 9200a and 9200b respectively manufactured
The ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has underg the first case member 210 and the second case member 220, the adhesion onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, and the fitting of the 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b , Therefore union of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes it is possible to undo the connection between the first case member 210 an member 220 It is possible to simply perform the undoing of the connec engagement parts 9200a and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9 the edge of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement 9201b from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case c 223 have been formed
Also, as illustrated in Figure 63, because one edge surface of the first members 210 and 220 are connected via the seal 9100, it is possible to per closing operations using the edge of the vertical wall parts 210c and 220 opening and closing operation in the arrow direction in Figure 63, or in th other words, the seal part 9100 is a connecting member to connect the first members 210 and 220, and it serves as a hinge material, which can open a and second case members 210 and 220 Therefore, the replacement of element 100 is performed by undoing the connection between the engage and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, and when the sec 220 is open with respect to the first case member 210, the new ink reservo inserted, and then, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are c present tenth example of embodiment, while the ink reservoir element 100 new one, it is also acceptable to use a product in which ink has been re-inj there is no remaining ink (or that there is no ink cartridge attached) There be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the stat cartridge 9014 with no ink reservoir element 100 contained has been attache reduce the possibility of generating printing problems. Next, referring to Figure 64, the eleventh example of embodiment
Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir element 9300 of the ele embodiment The ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of em within the first and second case members, but we will omit a detailed description of the first and second case members As illustrated in Figure 64, the ink reservoir element 9300 of the ele embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is formed through i using a resin material, and a bag element 9302 that has flexibility and which space to store the ink inside, and which is connected to the hard part 9301 T has a detection part (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the l 57a and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection senso supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the supply c example of embodiment .
Therefore, the ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example o manufactured using the hard part 9301 and the bag part 9302, and therefor have a simplified structure in comparison to the case where the entirety of element is formed through a molding using a resin material Therefore, improve the yield when manufacturing the ink reservoir element 9300, ma achieve a reduction in manufacturing costs
The ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of embodimen the bag part 9302 which forms the reservoir space to store the ink, and so w light that is emitted from the light emitting part 57a. Therefore, while it detect the amount of ink remaimng within the bag part 9302, it is possible there is an ink reservoir element 9300 contained within the first and seco and therefore, it is possible to prevent any printing processes from being multifunction device 1 while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not containe and second case menbers
Above, the present invention was descnbed based on the examples of the present invention is not limited to these examples of embodiments, and i that it would be possible to make various improvements or modifications w does not diverge from the claims of the present invention
Now, referring to Figures 65 to 67, the modified examples of the combin members will be decsribed Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams to explain the m of the combinations of the case members As described above, in the pr embodiment, the three types of cases 200, 1200 (or 1200α) and 2200 differing sizes for the outer shapes using the two types of first case mem case members 1210 and 2210 with different thicknesses, and the two type members 220 and second case member 2220 with different thicknesses In combination of the case members in this modified example can be formed cases with differing sizes of outer shape from four case members (where the is different) First, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure in Figure 65 (a), case Cl is formed of a case member 120 and a case thickness of the case member 120 is t20 and the thickness of the case me which is thicker than the thickness t20 As illustrated in Figure 65(b), case C 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65(d) are formed More specif formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and case C4 is fo member 121 and the case member r21
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r21 which form the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small scale case Cl, the la and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C4 are formed Also, the size outer shape of cases Cl to C4 are all different, with the relationship Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with different outer shapes amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120, r21, 121 and r22 In this way, in the manufacture of four types of cases with differing outer four case members requires a further second condition to be added to the abo This second condition is that the difference (t22-t21) between the thickness t the case member (case member r22) which forms the largest first ink cartrid the thickness t21 of one side of the case member (case member r21) that f third ink cartridge (Cl) must be different than the difference (t21-t20) betw t21 of the other side of the case member (case member 121) that forms th cartridge and the thickness t20 of the other side of the case member (case forms the smallest third ink cartridge For instance, if the first condition second condition was not, then the thicknesses would be t20=10 mm, t21=25 mm (t22 - 121=15 mm, t21 - 120=15 mm), and the thicknesses of each of th Cl=35 mm, C2=65 mm, C3=50 mm, and C4=50 mm, meaning only cases w sizes could be manufactured, and if both the first and second condition thicknesses would be t20=10 mm, t21=20 mm, and t22=40 mm (t22 - t2 t20=10 mm), and the thicknesses of each of the cases would be C 1=30 C3=50 mm, and C4=40 mm, making it possible to manufacture cases with fo formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and the case C6 case member 121 and the case member r20 Further, the difference between of the case member r20 and the thickness t22 of the case member r22 is difference between the thickness t21 of the case member 121 and the thickne member 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r20 which form the cas members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small scale case C5, the l and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C6 are formed Also, the size outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 are all different, with C5<C6<C3<C2. Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with differ according to the amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120,
Next, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure 67 As case
Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in Figure 65, the explanat omitted here As illustrated in Figure 67 (b), the case C7 is formed of the cas the case member r22 The thicknesses of the case members 122 and r22 are f
By changing the combination of the case members 120 and r21 which and the case members 122 and r22 which form the case C7, the case C3 ill 67(c) and the case C8 illustrated in Figure 67(d) are formed More specifical formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and the case C8 case member 122 and the case member r21. Further, the difference between of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is difference between the thickness t22 of the case member 122 and the thickne member 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r21 which form the cas members 122 and r22 which form the case C7, the small scale case Cl, the la - sizes (different internal capacities) from the four case members
Next, another modified example of the present example of embodiment In the above example of embodiment, by using the elasticity of the first a springs 630 and 650 and the first and second ambient air spπngs 730 an valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 are urged in the direction of the sup the ambient air joint 710 to block the ink flow path K and the ambient contrast, it is also acceptable to use the elasticity of the coil spring memb using either a metal material or a resin material to urge the supply valve an valve in the direction of the supply joint and the ambient air joint to block and the ambient air intake path Also, as long as the coil spring is formed suc part of it is corneal, then it is also possible to reduce the scale of the ink s and the ambient air intake mechanism Also, without using the supply sl ambient air slider 740, it is acceptable to construct the first supply spπng 63 supply spring 650 and the first ambient air spring 730 and the second ambi such that they are directly adjacent to each other, and further, to simplify t that the supply valve and ambient air intake valve are on the bottom plane of structure, it is possible to simplify the ink supply mechanism and the a mechanism, making it possible to achieve a reduction in manufacturing co also acceptable to have a structure in which the first supply (ambient ai second supply (ambient air) spring are connected as one unit. Also, with hook 626 and 726 in the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720, i connect the supply (ambient air) slider 640 (740) and the first and second su springs 630 and 650 (730 and 750) as one unit, and to have a construct unified supply (ambient air) slider and the first and second supply (ambien move freely part 614 and the joint contact part 613 of the supply joint 610 was formed form, it is also acceptable to form a groove around the periphery of the joi the supply joint. Because any displacement of the joint protruding part wil this groove, it is possible to reduce displacement in the insertion direction o part as the needle 49 is inserted Further, by increasing the inner diameter o part in relation to the inner diameter of the joint protruding part, it is possi transmission of the displacement of the joint protruding part to the joint cont
Also, in the above example of embodiment, while a film 160 was welde of the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b of the frame part 11 to close one opening using the side wall, and to weld the film 160 onto only In this case, the second opemng 112b side is closed by the side wall, a construction in which the film 160 is welded to the first opemng 112a, it is film 160 on the side wall of the ambient air connection passage 433, mak reduce the formation of a memscus on the ambient air connection passage case of closing the second opening 112b with the side wall, that side wa support substrate, and as this will provide the strength of the frame part, i have a construction in which the connection formation part (partition connected within the ink reservoir chamber, is not used. In this case, it is a an internal weld part only from one surface side of the support substrate Also, in the above example of embodiment, the film 160 that is welded o was constructed of a nylon layer on the frame part 110 side, but it is also acc water-resistant coating onto this nylon layer By using this type of construct to prevent the formation of a meniscus on the ambient air connection passage
Also, in the above example of embodiment, the ambient air comm forming part 430 was constructed such that it sloped downwards towards th Also, in the above example of embodiment, while all of the weldin performed using ultrasonic welding, in the case that it is possible to perform an adhesive, it is acceptable to make all attachments using an adhesiv acceptable to use a different welding method for welding For instance, t case 200 can be substituted with attachment using an adhesive as it is only i that the first and second case members 210 and 220 do not separate. Industrial Applicability
The ink cartridge and the ink jet recording apparatus of the present inv used for home and office uses

Claims

1. An ink cartridge comprising a case provided with an ink chamber configured to store ink therein configured to supply the ink stored in the ink chamber to an ink jet recordin the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recording apparatus, the case inclu an end surface serving as a side surface when the ink installation posture where the ink cartridge is installed in the apparatus, the end surface including an ink supply part configured to supply the ink i to the ink jet recording apparatus, and a first projection projecting outwardly from the en wherein, when the ink cartridge is in the installation posture, at least projection is disposed on a line vertically passing through a center of an o supply part 2 The ink cartridge according to claim 1, wherein the first projectio outwardly than the ink supply part
3 The ink cartridge according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the ink sup outwardly from the end surface of the case, and is provided with, at an en the opening through which ink in the ink chamber outflows 4 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 3, wherein th projects outwardly in the same direction as the ink supply portion projects 5 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the di ink supply portion and the first projection project is a horizontal directi cartridge is in the installation posture 6 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first projection which faces the ink supply part is formed flat or recessed
9 The ink cartridge according to any one of claims 1 through 8, projection is disposed at a lower end of the case when the ink cartridge is posture, and the ink supply part is disposed in a position closer to the lower end an upper end thereof when the ink cartridge is in the installation posture
10 The ink cartridge according to any one of claims 1 through 9, w shaped in substantially a rectangular solid including the end surface serving rectangular solid, and the first projection includes an inclined surface extending upward c a bottom surface of the case in the installation posture
11 The ink cartridge according to any one of claims 1 through 10, projection is configured to operate an installation detection switch dispos recording apparatus to detect whether the ink cartridge is installed when th installed in the ink jet recording apparatus
12 The ink cartridge according to claim 11, further compnsing a li projecting in the same direction as the first projection projects, the li configured to be radiated with light emitted from an optical sensor provi recording apparatus when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recordin 13 The ink cartridge according to one of claims 1 to 12, wherein th provided with a movable member configured to move in response to a c level in the ink chamber, the light radiated part is translucent and is provided with communicating with the ink chamber, and at least a part of the movable member is disposed in the inner s radiated part the first projection
16 The ink cartridge according to claim 15, wherein the second proje engaged portion configured to be engaged with an engaging portion dispo recording apparatus when the ink cartridge is installed in the ink jet recordin installation posture, ) and an end of the first projection collides with the engaging porti cartridge is being installed in the ink jet recording apparatus in an improper different from the installation posture 17. The ink cartridge according to claim 16, wherein the ink jet rec includes an accommodating portion defimng a space corresponding to a c cartridge and configured to receive the ink cartridge installed in a horizontal extracting member extending along a direction where the ink cartridge is accommodating portion, the extracting member configured to extract th chamber when the extracting member is inserted into the opening of the in and the first projection is configured so that, in a situation where th collides with the engaging portion while the ink cartridge is being inserte posture, a total length of the first projection and the engaging portion i length of the extracting member
18 The ink cartridge according to any one of claims 1 through 17, w recording apparatus includes an accommodating portion defining a space c contour of the ink cartridge and configured to receive the ink cartrid horizontal direction, and an extracting member extending along a directi cartridge is inserted into the accommodating portion, the extracting mem extract the mk in the ink chamber when the extracting member is inserted in claims 15 through 18, the ink jet recording apparatus comprising a recording device configured to perform recording by ejecting ink ink cartridge, an installation detection device configured to detect whether the installed based on output signals from the installation detection switch and t and a controlling device configured to control the recording device, and wherein the installation detection device detects that the ink cart when the installation detection device recognizes that the installation det been operated and an amount of light that the optical sensor received has bee the controlling device allows the recording device to perform re installation detection device detects that the ink cartridge is installed
PCT/JP2006/320004 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus WO2007037528A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005284646A JP4539517B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2005-09-29 ink cartridge
JP2005-284646 2005-09-29
JP2005-342697 2005-11-28
JP2005342697 2005-11-28
JP2005-377987 2005-12-28
JP2005377987 2005-12-28
JP2006063251A JP4524676B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2006-03-08 ink cartridge
JP2006-063251 2006-03-08
JP2006-081806 2006-03-23
JP2006081806A JP4479684B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2006-03-23 ink cartridge

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007037528A1 true WO2007037528A1 (en) 2007-04-05
WO2007037528A9 WO2007037528A9 (en) 2007-05-31

Family

ID=37744354

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2006/320004 WO2007037528A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1772273B2 (en)
AT (1) ATE404375T1 (en)
DE (2) DE602006002215D1 (en)
WO (1) WO2007037528A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8931887B2 (en) 2012-01-13 2015-01-13 Seiko Epson Corporation Liquid consumption apparatus, liquid supply member, and liquid supply system
US11090934B2 (en) 2017-08-31 2021-08-17 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Print fluid manifold

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SG11201602097UA (en) 2013-09-18 2016-05-30 Canon Kk Ink cartridge and ink jet printer

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001071522A (en) * 1999-09-03 2001-03-21 Canon Inc Liquid container and printing apparatus
JP2002370384A (en) * 2001-03-02 2002-12-24 Canon Inc Liquid container and liquid jet recorder using it

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0478244B1 (en) 1990-09-22 1997-08-13 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Ink cartridge and ink jet apparatus usable with ink cartridge
JPH0929989A (en) 1995-07-14 1997-02-04 Canon Inc Device for detecting presence or absence of ink, ink reserbvoir, kit, recording unit, recording device, and information processing system
US6074042A (en) * 1997-06-04 2000-06-13 Hewlett-Packard Company Ink container having a guide feature for insuring reliable fluid, air and electrical connections to a printing system
CN101386229B (en) * 2000-01-21 2012-11-07 精工爱普生株式会社 Ink cartridge for ink-jet recording apparatus
KR100481535B1 (en) * 2001-05-17 2005-04-07 세이코 엡슨 가부시키가이샤 Ink cartridge and method of ink injection thereinto
MXPA03002490A (en) 2002-03-20 2004-10-15 Seiko Epson Corp Ink cartridge and ink cartridge holder.
JP4529560B2 (en) 2004-01-30 2010-08-25 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Liquid container

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001071522A (en) * 1999-09-03 2001-03-21 Canon Inc Liquid container and printing apparatus
JP2002370384A (en) * 2001-03-02 2002-12-24 Canon Inc Liquid container and liquid jet recorder using it

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8931887B2 (en) 2012-01-13 2015-01-13 Seiko Epson Corporation Liquid consumption apparatus, liquid supply member, and liquid supply system
US9004659B2 (en) 2012-01-13 2015-04-14 Seiko Epson Corporation Liquid consumption apparatus, liquid supply member, and liquid supply system
US11090934B2 (en) 2017-08-31 2021-08-17 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Print fluid manifold

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2007037528A9 (en) 2007-05-31
EP1772273B1 (en) 2008-08-13
DE202006020782U1 (en) 2010-02-04
EP1772273B2 (en) 2011-06-01
EP1772273A3 (en) 2007-05-16
EP1772273A2 (en) 2007-04-11
ATE404375T1 (en) 2008-08-15
DE602006002215D1 (en) 2008-09-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2007037536A1 (en) Ink cartridge and method for replacing ink reservoir element in ink cartridge
US7828421B2 (en) Ink cartridge arrangements
EP1772274B2 (en) Ink cartridge, set of ink cartridges and ink jet recording system
US8025376B2 (en) Ink cartridges
EP1772271B1 (en) Ink Cartridge and inkjet recording apparatus
US7810916B2 (en) Ink cartridges
US7553007B2 (en) Ink cartridges
WO2007037528A1 (en) Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus
EP1772269B1 (en) Ink Cartridge
EP1772272B1 (en) Ink cartridge
US7837311B2 (en) Ink cartridges
US7682004B2 (en) Ink cartridges
EP1772277B1 (en) Ink cartridge
EP1772276B1 (en) Ink cartridge with light-receiving and light-blocking portion
EP1772275B1 (en) Unit of ink cartridges and ink cartridge

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200680006466.6

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06811331

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1